JP6872255B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that shoots a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board to play a game. The launch of the game ball is performed by operating a launch operation unit including a launch handle or the like that can be rotated, and it is possible to adjust the strength of the launch intensity according to the operation mode. In the game area, various entrances are provided to trigger game operations such as payout of prize balls and winning / fail judgment, and the entrances to be entered are predetermined according to the game state. .. The player operates the launch operation unit, launches the game ball aiming at the ball entry port to be entered, and advances the game. In this type of gaming machine, a first region in which a gaming ball launched with a relatively weak firing intensity (also referred to as "first firing intensity") flows down, and a relatively strong firing intensity ("second firing intensity"). A second area in which the game ball launched in (also referred to as) flows down is provided in the game area, and a game machine having a game property of launching the game ball toward the first area or the second area depending on the game state. Is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-221105

However, in a board configuration in which a ball passage having a passage width equivalent to that of about one game ball is provided from the upstream side to the downstream side of the second region as in Patent Document 1, the second firing intensity is obtained (toward the second region). There is only one path through which the launched game ball can flow down. Therefore, there is a problem that the degree of freedom of adjustment related to the game ball launched at the second firing intensity, such as the amount of the game ball flowing down the second region and the ball entry rate, is low.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of freedom of adjustment related to a gaming ball launched at a second firing intensity. is there.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention has adopted the following configuration.

That is, the gaming machine of means 1 is
A game board with a game area formed on the surface,
A launch operation unit that can be operated by the player,
A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward the gaming area based on the operation of the launching operation unit is provided.
The firing intensity of the game ball by the launching means can be adjusted according to the operation mode of the launching operation unit.
The game area includes a first area in which a game ball launched with a first firing intensity can flow down, and a second area in which a game ball launched with a second firing intensity higher than the first firing intensity can flow down. , Is provided,
The game board was launched with a first path for guiding a game ball launched at the second firing intensity to an entry region provided with an entry port in the second region, and at the second firing intensity. The first path is a second path that guides the game ball from the upstream side of the ball entry area to the outside of the game area without guiding the game ball to the ball entry area, and a flow path of the game ball launched with the second firing intensity. A branch portion for branching to the second path and a discharge port for discharging the game balls distributed to the second path to the outside of the machine are provided.
The branch portion is on the upper right side of the surface of the game board, the ball entry area is on the lower right side of the surface of the game board, and the discharge port is on the lower right side of the surface of the game board and is on the right side of the ball entry area. It is provided outside the game area,
Said first path and said second path is assumed to pass through the surface right side of the game board, and has the right of the first ball path is assumed to pass through said second path,
The first path is provided with a first ball passage extending up and down between the branch portion and the ball entry region.
The second path is provided with a second ball passage extending up and down between the branch portion and the discharge port.
The first ball passage and the second ball passage are provided side by side on the surface side of the game board , and the second ball passage is provided on the right side of the first ball passage . Is the gist.

According to such a gaming machine, the flow path of the game ball launched at the second firing intensity includes the first path for guiding the game ball to the entry area in the second region and the first path for guiding the game ball to the entry region without guiding the game ball to the entry region. There is a second path leading to the outside of the gaming area. Therefore, depending on the design value of the ratio (passage rate) at which the game ball launched at the second firing intensity flows down (passes) through the first path or the second path, the ball entering region (within the second region) or the game The amount of game balls guided out of the area can be adjusted. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom of adjustment related to the game ball launched at the second firing intensity. In addition, vertically extending ball passages (first ball passage and second ball passage) are provided side by side on the surface side of the game board in each of the first path and the second path passing through the surface side of the game board. Therefore, the game ball passing through (flowing down) through the second ball passage (second path) can be visually recognized.

According to the above invention, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of adjustment related to the game ball launched at the second firing intensity.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot judgment table, (B) is a jackpot type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table which shows the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting and entering a ball. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 changing process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 confirmation process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 changing process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow-down path (the game ball passage) of the game ball in the right game area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other form of the flow-down path (the game ball passage) of the game ball in the right game area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect symbol game effect of the state A which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect symbol game effect of the state B which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect symbol game effect of the state C which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect symbol game effect which concerns on Example 2, (a) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the 15R big hit variation effect of the effect mode C, (B) is the 15R big hit variation effect of the effect mode D. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the 2R jackpot variation effect which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is a table which shows the correspondence between the game state and the ending period which concerns on Example 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st ending effect which concerns on Example 3. FIG. It is a table which shows the correspondence of a character which concerns on Example 3 and a notice pattern, and the like.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to the player. , An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is detachably configured from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

Further, the front frame 51 can supply a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a player's operation amount (rotation angle), and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (collectively, these two effect buttons) that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. (It is also simply referred to as "directing button 63"). As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example,) that can detect the input from the player or that the player directly contacts the button portion to input the effect button 63. , Appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. Good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed so as to protrude toward the surface and to be inclined outward. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similarly to the image display device 7 to be described later, depending on the execution / non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game production (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo production, information about the game (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive villas, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production, etc.) , Information on game machine settings (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or display the same information among these information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There are cases where it is done. Further, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end portion) is attached to the front frame 51 via the second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). Has been done. Therefore, the hinges 75 for the upper and lower second image display devices can be rotated in the left-right direction as an axis. More specifically, it is configured to be rotatable to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because the second image display device 71, which is provided so as to project forward of the front frame 51 when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, pachinko. This is a configuration to prevent the game machine 1 from colliding with the hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-table equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) and being damaged. .. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the end on the open side) is fixed to the front frame 51 and is non-rotatable.

On the game board 2, a game area 3 into which the game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down is formed so as to be surrounded by the rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding the game ball are projected in the game area 3. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back surface side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as "effect symbol display unit"). ) Is provided, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the gaming state according to the gaming state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game in. The production symbol 8L is also referred to as a "left symbol", the production symbol 8C is also referred to as a "middle symbol", and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as a "right symbol".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A, which will be described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low probability low base state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the start port (second start port 21) is set lower than in the high base state (first game state). At the same time, the probability of winning / failing the special symbol (the first special symbol winning / failing judgment and the second special symbol winning / failing judgment) is low (also referred to as “predetermined probability”), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the first special symbol. It is set longer (more than twice) than the fluctuation time of (all deviation fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, the game ball is launched into the right game area 3B (also referred to as “second game area” or “second area”) and enters the start port (second start port 21 or third start port 26). Rather than letting the ball fluctuate to display the second special symbol, the game ball is launched into the left game area 3A (also referred to as the "first game area" or the "first area") and entered into the first starting port 20. It is said that it is advantageous for the player to play the game in which the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that the game state is a game state in which the first special symbol (directed symbol) is mainly used for variable display. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are configured to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display 41a (“first”) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display unit") and the second special displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit"). The result of the variation display of the symbol (the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. In addition, any (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". Further, the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also simply referred to as "hit / fail judgment" or "first hit / fail judgment". Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol winning / failing determination is also referred to as a "winning / failing determination executing means" or a "first winning / failing determination executing means".

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific hit), the production symbol is stopped with the same three-digit doublet (also called "big hit symbol") such as "777". indicate. In addition, in the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special symbol for small hits such as "3 ★ 3" (also referred to as a "small hit symbol") is used. Stop and display the design. It should be noted that, when a small hit occurs, the symbol dedicated to the small hit may be stopped and displayed, and the symbol of the same aspect may be stopped and displayed for the small hit symbol and the off symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is incorrect, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is stopped and displayed as a different design ("Missing symbol"). Also called). As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination) by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather directs the result. The effect symbol 8 displayed in the symbol display area 7b is viewed and grasped. Further, as the execution mode of the variable display of the effect symbol, for example, a mode of scrolling display in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, etc. In addition to 7b, one or both of the second effect symbol display unit 71a and the third effect symbol display unit 72a are used to display the effect. In addition to this, it may have an aspect in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display unit 71a or the third effect symbol display unit 72a.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect (effect symbol game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, it is executed in association with the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). The hit game production (big hit game production, small hit game production) and the demonstration production for waiting for customers are displayed. In addition, in the production pattern game production, the winning game production, and the demonstration production, in addition to the production symbols such as numbers, the production images other than the production symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed. Further, as will be described in detail later, the game state (state A, state B or state C), the state in which the game ball is fired in the left game area 3A to play the game, or the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is being played or the like. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously) in a variable manner, and is a game of this type. The machine is also called a "simultaneous variable machine (parallel variable machine)".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of storages of the first special figure hold, which will be described later, is displayed. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special figure hold display 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, displays the first special figure hold. The number of memories of the second special figure hold and the number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect, etc.) to be executed. In addition, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol (effect symbol) depending on the game state) is displayed. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED is provided and can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided so as to be able to move along with the game effect. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined) with the execution of the game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting. The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player enhances the interest in the game and raises the expectation for the hit.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct ( The first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the first hit / fail judgment) is executed, the first special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, the gate 28 (normal drawing start port, pass port, ball entry port, and specific start) through which the game ball can pass (enter) (Also called a mouth) is provided. The game ball that has entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is a gate 28 and also a start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) into the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation condition) is satisfied, it is normal. Along with executing the symbol winning / failing judgment (also referred to as "normal symbol winning / failing judgment" or "third winning / failing judgment"), the normal symbol starts to change and the normal symbol is displayed based on the result of the normal symbol winning / failing judgment after a predetermined time has elapsed. Stop display. When the hit normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens) and the second starting port 21 is opened. Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol hit / fail determination of whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opened) to open the second starting port 21 is a "hit / fail determination executing means". It is also referred to as a "third hit / miss determination execution means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the entry into the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied (“big hit”). It is also called "executable state" or "big hit standby state"). Therefore, if the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, the control process related to the normal symbol is performed and the big hit start process is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot standby state), the standby jackpot game starts, and the predetermined jackpot (a predetermined jackpot) The round game in which the first large winning opening 30) is opened (the ball can be entered) starts.

In the game area 3 on the right side of the center decoration 10 (right game area 3B) in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first large winning opening 30 is provided. A large winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable entrance") is provided. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and the opening / closing member 32 opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30. The opening / closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass through. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first large winning opening 30. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 to form the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Is gone. As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the first large winning opening 30 will enter the first large winning opening 30. In this way, the opening / closing member 32 that opens / closes the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down is smoothly moved to the first large. In addition to allowing the ball to enter the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (the second starting port 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It will be possible. It should be noted that the game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, in the first large winning device 31 (first variable entrance), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 allows the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and in which the game ball can enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 including a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct ( The second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the second hit / fail judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) of the first winning opening 30 (upper and lower), and the upper game ball passage provided with the third starting port 26, the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 and the first. A lower side game ball passage in which the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by coming into contact with the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26. Alternatively, the ball flows downstream without entering the third start port 26 and flows into the out port 34 (first out port 34a, discharge port). In addition, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device (ball entrance) that allows the player to enter the ball at all times, the left-handed game becomes a big hit (so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is hit right. When executed in the game, the game ball can be entered (held) into the third start port 26 during the big hit game, and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the end of the big hit game.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable start port” or a “variable start port”) including the second start port 21 of the formula is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct (first). 1) The special symbol hit / fail judgment) is executed, the first special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is perfect when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the game ball is in the open state. It does not have to be the one that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

Further, like the opening / closing member 32, the movable member 23 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second starting port 21 is closed and the movable member 23 is said to be closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21. It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down can be seen. The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21, and the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) is passed through the inclined upper surface passage in any direction (the second major winning opening 35, which will be described later). Induce to.

In this way, in a state where the game ball is launched into the right side area (right game area 3B) and the game is played, when the game ball enters the second start opening 21, the first special symbol hit / fail determination is executed. When the first special symbol fluctuates and the game ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the second special symbol fluctuates and displays. Therefore, in the state where the game ball is launched into the right side area (right game area 3B) and the game is played (right-handed game), the game state (state B: low accuracy high) in which the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the first special symbol. It has a base state (high accuracy and high base state) and a gaming state (state C: high accuracy and low base state) in which the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol.

Further, in the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the second start opening 21, a second large winning opening 35 is provided. A large winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable entrance") is provided. The second prize-winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens and closes the second prize-winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 is closed and the opening / closing member 37 is opened / closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second large winning opening 35. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that had been used disappears from the entrance of the second large winning opening 35. As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 will enter the second large winning opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens / closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second large winning opening 35, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the closed state (when closed) is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second large winning device 36 (second variable entrance) opens and closes the opening / closing member 37 so that the game ball cannot enter the ball (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

Further, a plurality (three) general entry ports 27 are provided in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3. The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. A method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called a left-handed hit, and a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called a right-handed hit. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low accuracy low base state, state A) at the start of the game is left-handed to aim at entering the first starting port 20. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly composed of a left-handed ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol hit / miss determination).

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol hit / fail judgment), the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) is completed (low accuracy, high base state, high accuracy). In the high base state or high accuracy low base state), right-handed to enter the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, the third starting opening 26, or the second big winning opening 35. It will be a game aiming at the ball. Specifically, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, first, the big hit standby state is set, and the right-handed game is aimed at entering the gate 28. Next, when the ball enters the gate 28 (start gate 29) in the big hit standby state, the big hit game starts, and the right-handed game mainly aims at entering the first big winning opening 30.

Further, when the big hit game ends and the game state after the big hit game ends becomes the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state (state B), it mainly goes to the gate 28 (normal figure gate) and the second starting port 21. It will be a right-handed game aiming at the entry of the ball. On the other hand, when the big hit game ends and the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a high-accuracy low base state (state C), a right-handed game aiming at entering the third start opening 26 and the second big winning opening 35 Become. That is, the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state (state B) are right-handed games mainly in which the ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) by right-handed hitting. The low base state (state C) is a right-handed game in which the ball enters the third starting port 26 (the second special symbol hit / fail determination) by right-handed hitting. As a result, even in the same right-handed game, the main starting port (target of the special symbol winning / failing determination) differs depending on the game state (state B or state C).

Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), a second out port 34b (exhaust port) is provided on the upstream side of the gate 28 and flows into the game area downstream of the gate 28 of the right game area 3B. The amount of game balls to be played can be adjusted (reduced). That is, the second out port 34b is installed on the upstream side of all the ball entry ports installed in the right game area 3B, and the game nails provided in the vicinity of the second out port 34b allow the ball entry ports to be opened. The rate of entry of game balls into the installation area (ratio of entry) can be adjusted. Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), the third out port 34c is located downstream of the second starting port 21 and upstream of the second large winning opening 35, which is a large winning opening for small hits. (Discharge port) is provided. With this third out port 34c, the rate of entry of the game ball into the game area on the side of the second large winning opening 35 when a small hit occurs, that is, the rate of entry of the game ball into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. It is adjustable. A game nail provided in the vicinity of the third out opening 34c makes it possible to adjust the entry ratio (entry ratio) of the game ball into the second large winning opening 35.

Then, when a game ball enters the first start opening 20, the second start opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, the second big winning opening 35, and the general entry opening 27, each entry opening is used. A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" and "game profits") are paid out (given) in. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of game profit) paid out based on the entry into the first large winning opening 30 is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first big winning opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second big winning opening 35 pays out 10 prize balls for one winning ball. The prize ball is to be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. On the main display 40, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. A device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of a normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information") are included. Further, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information (first) related to the second special symbol. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of 2 special figure hold) and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. ing.

Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the launch direction of the game ball, that is, the right A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the player should hit the ball or hit the ball to the left. Further, the main display 40 includes a variable state indicator 49 indicating a variable state (c1) of the first special symbol, a variable state (c2) of the second special symbol, and a variable state (c3) of the normal symbol. There is. The various indicators included in the main indicator 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later.

The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped, and the special symbol (stop symbol) displayed as a stop is displayed to display the first start port 20 and the second start port 20. The result of the hit / fail judgment (special symbol hit / fail judgment, big hit lottery) based on the entry into the 21 or the third starting port 26 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), it is an open pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as a stop. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) that opens the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30 and / or second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is the 4R first big hit, the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the 4R second big hit is reached, the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. Similar to the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is defined as a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss). Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on so that light flows repeatedly to the light.

As described above, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are each composed of a plurality of LEDs (display units), and during the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 41a A plurality of LEDs corresponding to are lit (blinking) in a predetermined order, and when the fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is displayed by the jackpot type (one mode if one type). ), Small hit type (1 mode if 1 type) and off type (1 mode if 1 type) are stopped and displayed.

Further, the fluctuation state display 49 includes a display unit c1 (LEDc1), a display unit c2 (LEDc2), and a display unit c3 (LEDc3), and the display unit c1 indicates the fluctuation state of the first special symbol, and the display unit. The fluctuating state of the second special symbol is indicated by c2, and the fluctuating state of the normal symbol is indicated by the display unit c3. Specifically, the display unit c1 indicating the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is composed of one LED (display unit) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display unit) than the first special symbol display 41a. Has been done. Then, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the variable time of the first special symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off and the stop is displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the stop is displayed in red regardless of the big hit type. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c1 is displayed in blinking during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, is displayed in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is displayed in red when the jackpot symbol is stopped, and is stopped in the off symbol. Is turned off (hidden). Thereby, by looking at the display unit c1 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (during, interrupted, stopped, hit / fail determination result) of the first special symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the first special symbol display 41a, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type in detail, but the variable state is present. Can be easily grasped. Further, the variable state display 49 (display unit c1) functions as a second first special symbol display 41a. In addition, "interruption of variation display" is a process that can be performed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol (second special symbol) executed at the same time is a big hit, and the variation display is temporarily interrupted. Then, after the cancellation condition is satisfied, the variable display is restarted.

Further, the display unit c2 indicating the fluctuation state of the second special symbol is one LED (display unit, display) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display) than the second special symbol display 41b, similarly to the display unit c1. It is composed of a display unit). Then, during the variation display of the second special symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the variation time of the second special symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. Specifically, if it is off, it will be turned off and stopped, if it is a big hit, it will be stopped and displayed in red regardless of the big hit type, and if it is a small hit, it will be turned on in green regardless of the small hit type (small hit mode). Stop display with. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed by lighting in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c2 is displayed in a blinking manner during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, is displayed in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is displayed in red when the jackpot symbol is stopped, and the small hit symbol is stopped. The inside is lit in green, and the off symbol is turned off (hidden) while it is stopped. Thereby, by looking at the display unit c2 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (changing, interrupting, stopping, hit / fail determination result) of the second special symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the second special symbol indicator 41b, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type in detail, but the variable state is present. Can be easily grasped. Further, the variable state display 49 (display unit c2) functions as a second second special symbol display 41b.

The display mode (design) displayed on the display unit c1 of the variable state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state symbol" or a "first sub-symbol". Further, since the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c1, it is also referred to as "first confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as" confirmation symbol ")". Further, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c2 is also referred to as a "second state symbol" or a "second sub symbol". Further, since the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c2, it is also referred to as "second confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as" confirmation symbol ")". In addition, the first state symbol corresponds to the variation display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the second state symbol corresponds to the variation display and the stop display of the second special symbol. Variable display and stop display are displayed. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is wrong, the first state symbol is turned off (off mode) and stopped and displayed, and in the case of a big hit, all are lit in red regardless of the big hit type (big hit mode). Stop display with. The relationship between the second special symbol and the second state symbol is also the same.

Further, the display unit c3 indicating the fluctuation state of the normal symbol is a single LED (display unit) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display unit) than the normal symbol display 42, similarly to the display unit c1. It is configured. Then, during the variable display of the normal symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the normal symbol hit / miss determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off and the stop is displayed, and in the case of a hit, the stop is displayed in red regardless of the hit type. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c3 is displayed blinking while the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed, is lit in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is lit in red when the hit symbol is stopped, and is turned off when the off symbol is stopped. (Hidden). As a result, by looking at the display unit c3 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (during, interrupted, stopped, hit / fail determination result) of the normal symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the normal symbol display 42, it is difficult to grasp the hit type and the like in detail, but the variable state is easy. It becomes possible to grasp.

The display mode (design) displayed on the display unit c3 of the variable state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state normal symbol" or a "first sub-normal symbol". In addition, the first state normal symbol displays a variable display and a stop display corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is wrong, the light is turned off (off mode) and the stop is displayed, and if the hit is hit, the red light is turned on (hit mode) regardless of the hit type.

In this embodiment, the special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and the fluctuation state display 49 are provided, and the fluctuation state of the special symbol can be grasped by any of them. , When any LED of the special symbol display (1st special symbol display 41a, 2nd special symbol display 41b) having a large number of LEDs capable of grasping the fluctuation state in detail fails (damage, disconnection, etc.) However, the fluctuation state indicator 49 makes it possible to grasp the approximate fluctuation state. The same applies to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable state display 49. Further, in the present embodiment, the display control of both the special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and the variable state display 49 is performed by the main control unit.

Here, among the stop display modes (display results of variable display) of special symbols and effect symbols, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as "hit mode". , "Specific mode", "Specific display mode" or "Specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order is referred to as "off mode" or "non-specific mode". , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit is also referred to as the "big hit mode", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit is "small". It is also called "hit mode". Further, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. It is also called "variable display means" or "identification information display means".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26, various types of random numbers for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct are used based on the entry of the game ball. Information (also referred to as “acquired information”) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, it is stored as the first special figure hold (also referred to as "first acquisition information"). If the information is stored in the unit 85a and acquired based on the entry into the third starting port 26, it is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). Will be done. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four each. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry. That is, during the execution of the variable display of each special symbol or the execution of the special game based on any of the special symbol hit / fail judgments, the special symbol hit / fail judgment for the entry is made up to a predetermined number (4 each). It is possible to reserve (hold) the right of.

The number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold, the first special figure is held. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as "u ● v □". Further, when the number of holds is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●". Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of holds 1 to 1. No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol fluctuatingly for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”) in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Also called) is performed. Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as the auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment depending on the lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). Further, when the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in a mode in which only the t LED is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct based on the passage of the game ball, and the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of passage, that is, during the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (hold) the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number of cards.

The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red as in "q □ r ●". Further, the number of hold numbers 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (“main control unit” or “main control unit”) that controls game profits such as a special symbol winning / failing determination, a normal symbol winning / failing determination, and a transition of a game state. (Also referred to as a "game control unit"), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "effect control unit") that controls an effect to be executed as the game progresses, a game ball. The payout control board 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”) that controls the payout, the effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the pattern displayed on the effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, It also includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided at a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, there is a main control board storage case. An image control board storage case containing the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case containing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal drawing holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, as the sensors, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the third start port sensor 26a, the gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second The large winning opening sensor 35a and the general entry opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The third start port sensor 26a is provided in the third start port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third start port 26. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The general entry port sensor 27a is provided in each general entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general entry port 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first winning opening solenoid 33, and the second winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and the like are commonly used. Figure Hold indicator 44, variable state indicator 49, round indicator 45, game status indicator 46, launch direction indicator 47, and hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. A payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The launching device 112 includes a launching handle 60 (see FIG. 1) as a launching operation unit that can be operated by the player, and receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 61 based on the operation of the launching handle 61. They are fired toward the game area 3 (game board 2) one by one (launching means). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation to insert a prepaid card (game). It enables ball lending based on the information stored in the value storage medium) or the like.

The payout control board 110 is equipped with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls and pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launching device 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 is the firing handle 60. Detects the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength (launch intensity) corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115 (launching means).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“microcomputer for effect control”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, a voice control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is used as the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display 102, third effect hold display 103a, and fourth effect hold display 103b. Let control be performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, reserved symbols, etc.). Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which variable display and stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment) is shown by turning on / off the corresponding LED or by color. Stop display with. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b also consist of two LEDs, respectively. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the third effect hold display 103a is displayed by the number of holds displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that indicates the same number of holds as the number of holds. Further, the fourth effect hold display 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed by the second special figure hold display 43b. To.

The character symbol is displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit) to display the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit). By covering a part or substantially the entire part), a part or all of the effect symbol 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d may be invisible. is there. Even in such a covered state, these effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on, so that the variation display and stop display of the effect symbol, the number of hold items, and the like can be surely confirmed. A fourth effect holding indicator 103b is provided. The display modes of the effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b are always visible without being hindered by the operation of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Also referred to as lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, on the sub-control board 90, the first effect button detection switch 63c and the first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.) are performed. 2 The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

Next, the control related to the determination of whether or not the special symbol is correct in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct, it has "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. .. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol winning / failing determination. That is, different hit types (big hits) depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, another specific result, or the like. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game to be executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profit that can be obtained differs depending on the special game, or the game state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", and "15Rth". There are "5 big hits", "2R 6th big hits", and "2R 7th big hits". In "15R 1st big hit" and "15R 5th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 15 times. Further, in "4R 2nd big hit", "4R 3rd big hit", and "4R 4th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening of the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 4 times. In "2R 6th big hit" and "2R 7th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 2 times. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big hit big winning opening (big hit variable entry opening)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot" indicate the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. , Move to the high probability state described later (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as "probability variation jackpots (high probability jackpots)". This high probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, the "4R 4th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot" shift the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to the low probability state described later (the probability variation function is not activated). Therefore, these two types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot" set the variation time of the 2nd special symbol to a short time after the end of the jackpot game. Activate "function" and do not activate high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (state C). This high-accuracy low-base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In this high-accuracy low-base state, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is longer than that of the low-accuracy low-base state, the low-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy high-base state. It is set. In particular, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is incorrect, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (see FIG. 9).

Further, the game playability in the high accuracy and low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, the third start is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged. Let the ball enter the mouth 26. Then, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed, a small hit is generated, and the game ball can be increased in the period (between the big hits) between the previous big hit and the next big hit. In addition, by making small hits occur frequently in the high accuracy and low base state during the big hits, it is expected that many game balls can be acquired in a short period of time by the small hits. That is, it is an advantageous period for the player, and it is a period in which it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the "4R 4th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot" activate the "first special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the jackpot game is completed. Due to the operation of the first special symbol time reduction function, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is shorter than that when the first special symbol time reduction function is not activated (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state). Set to time. Since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 100 times. .. When the special symbol variation display ends based on being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, as will be described in detail later, in the low accuracy and high base state, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above, and then the next It is a period in which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, the "4R 3rd big hit" and the "2R 6th big hit" activate the "1st special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the end of the big hit game. Since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a high accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", the "1st special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" continue until the next jackpot occurs. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" will continue until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "4R 3rd big hit" and "2R 6th big hit", the high accuracy high base state (1st special symbol time saving state) is set after the big hit game is completed until the next big hit occurs.

In the high-accuracy high-base state, as in the low-accuracy high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made, and the game is expected to occur in the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy and low-base state is a period to be performed, and as described above, many game balls are played in a short period of time by making small hits frequently while executing the second special symbol hit / fail judgment by right-handed games. It is a favorable period for the player, who can also expect to acquire. It should be noted that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the high accuracy and low base state than those that can be acquired in the high accuracy and high base state.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (4R 3rd big hit game) related to "4R 3rd big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (4R 4th big hit game) related to "4R 4th big hit". By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot was "4R 3rd jackpot", the high accuracy and high base state continued even after the variation display of the special symbol had passed 100 times, and it was "4R 4th jackpot". In this case, the gaming state becomes a low-probability low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays with the expectation that the high-accuracy and high-base state will continue even after 100 times have passed, regardless of the game state, and enhances the interest of the game. In the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state, that is, in the high-base state, the player does not reduce the number of balls held so much (in a state where the rate of decrease of the balls held is slower than in the low-accuracy low-base state). It can be performed.

Similarly, after the end of the big hit game (2R 6th big hit game) related to "2R 6th big hit" and the high accuracy high base state, and after the end of the big hit game (2R 7th big hit game) related to "2R 7th big hit". By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low accuracy and high base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. To do. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot was "2R 6th jackpot", the high accuracy and high base state continued even after the variation display of the special symbol had passed 100 times, and it was "2R 7th jackpot". In this case, the gaming state becomes a low-probability low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays with the expectation that the high-accuracy and high-base state will continue even after 100 times have passed, regardless of the game state, and enhances the interest of the game.

In addition, as for the small hits that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment, the number of times the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is opened is set to six times, and one time (and) compared to other big hits. The total opening time is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed 6 times for 0.3 seconds for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, as compared with the big hit game (for example, the 15R first big hit game, the 4R fourth big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small hit game is set to be smaller. However, in the high accuracy and low base state between big hits, by generating small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute a plurality of small hit games and acquire more game balls. In addition, in all small hits, the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the first big winning opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second large winning opening 35 is also referred to as a "small hit large winning opening (small hit variable entry opening)". In the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times it is opened. In addition, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of small hits, and if the gaming state at the time of small hits is a high probability state, it is considered to be a high probability state even after the small hits are completed, and when small hits occur. If the game state of is a low probability state, it is considered to be a low probability state even after the small hit game is completed. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of small hits.

In addition, the distribution probability to each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 20% for the 15R first jackpot, 10% for the 4R second jackpot, 35% for the 4R third jackpot, and the 4R first jackpot. The 4 jackpots are 35%. On the other hand, the jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 50% for the 15R 5th jackpot, 15% for the 2R 6th jackpot, and 35% for the 2R 7th jackpot. That is, if a big hit is obtained by the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the third starting port 26 (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) in which the fluctuation frequency is improved by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later, 15R It becomes a big hit (15R 5th big hit), and a large amount of game balls can be acquired in a short period of time. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the hit / fail judgment (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is a first hit rather than a big hit. 3 It is highly possible that a big hit is advantageous for the player (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) in the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the game ball enters the starting port 26. It is set to be. In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R fifth big hit and the occurrence of a high-accuracy low-base state in which the number of game balls can be increased by the small hit.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and when it becomes a big hit. The determination of the type of jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". It should be noted that the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit. As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, or the third starting port 26 include a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not and a random number for determining the jackpot type. In addition, there is a "variable pattern random number (also referred to as" variable pattern information ")". Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation mode) including the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The variation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct as shown in FIG. 7B. The normal symbol hit / miss determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol hit / miss determination). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port 21 is in the operating state or not. It has a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of operating states. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated is called a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not activated is called a "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/63), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/315). That is, in the low-probability state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the low-probability state, but in the high-probability state, the jackpot judgment for the high-probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number judged to be a big hit is large. A hit / fail judgment is made using the table (see FIG. 8 (A)). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit (the stop symbol will be the jackpot symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (big hit probability) is called a "probability setting means".

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective ball entry to the starting port (ball entry that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantages and disadvantages of the player, it is set as the "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. The state A (low accuracy low base state) and the state B (low accuracy high base state) shown in FIG. , High accuracy and high base state). In the state A (low probability low base state), when the player plays a right-handed game and puts the game ball into the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed and the second special symbol is executed. Is displayed in a variable manner. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for the big hit, 1000 seconds for the small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state). Is also referred to as "first condition state"). Since the base is low (first game state), it is impossible or difficult to enter the second starting port 21.

Therefore, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large number of game balls even if the right-handed game is performed in the state A. Therefore, in the state A, the game proceeds in the left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in the variable state in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , The first special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

On the other hand, in the state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), since the high base state (second game state) and the first special symbol time saving function is operating, the right-handed game is performed. As a result, it is possible to enter both the second starting port 21 and the third starting port 26 which are in the open state. In the state B, as in the state A, the second special symbol time saving function is not operating. Therefore, when the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the variable time of the second special symbol is a very long time. Since it is set to (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for big hit, 1000 seconds for small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly. However, when the ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, by operating the first special symbol time saving function, the first special symbol time saving state is set, and the first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed more frequently than the state A, and the game can proceed smoothly.

In addition, it has a state C (high accuracy and low base state) shown in FIG. 9 as a state mainly for determining whether or not the second special symbol is correct. In state C (high accuracy and low base state), since the second special symbol time saving function is activated, it is possible to play a game aiming at entering the third starting port 26 by performing a right-handed game. It becomes. When the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, by operating the second special symbol time saving function, the second special symbol time saving state is set, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed more frequently than the states A and B, and the game proceeds smoothly. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to execute the second special symbol winning / failing determination, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol winning / failing determination.

In the state C, when the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss judgment is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the first special symbol is displayed. Since the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to a very long time (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for big hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the state C, even if the ball is entered into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, or if there is a hold memory related to the first special symbol winning / failing determination, the second special symbol winning / failing determination is performed. It is possible to reduce as much as possible the possibility that the disadvantageous first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed.

As described above, although the state B and the state C are both states in which the right-handed game is performed, in the state B, as in the state C, the game state is set in which the first special symbol winning / failing determination is mainly performed, and the state C is performed. Then, it is regarded as a game state in which the second special symbol winning / failing judgment is mainly performed. As a result, it becomes a big hit in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) in which the left-handed game is performed, and in the so-called consecutive villa period (right-handed state) after shifting to the right-handed game, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. The game is diversified by shifting between the game state in which the game is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol winning / failing judgment is mainly performed. In addition, since the game state in which the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed have different types of jackpots (big hit games) that can occur, right-handed strikes. During the continuation of the game, different big hits (big hit games) are generated by the transition of these game states. This makes it possible to prevent the game from getting bored and enhance the game's interest.

Further, when the second special symbol time saving function is activated, that is, in the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. 9, the second Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player can play the right-handed game smoothly without reducing the number of balls held compared to the left-handed game (second special symbol hit / fail judgment, first). 2 It becomes possible to execute a special symbol variable game). Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time saving function is not activated during the period when the second special symbol time saving function is operating (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made longer than the normal state). However, the first special symbol time saving function may be activated. Further, in the state B, the holding ball is maintained or slightly decreased, and in the state C, it is increased.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function (first special symbol time reduction function or second special symbol time reduction function) for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) operate at the same time. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) in the game state, and the low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as "general figure high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (win random number) determined to be a hit is larger than that of the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C) for the state B. Using the normal symbol hit determination table, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Further, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Further, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to open. The second starting port is opened during the operation period. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation of 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). .. Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening / closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be set to open once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be set to open three times for 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be set to 6 times of 1.0 seconds, which may be larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as an operation of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, as compared with the low base state in which these functions are not activated. , The period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes higher (also referred to as "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the first special symbol winning / failing determination becomes high. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand.

Further, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of times of opening is small. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is in the closed state during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The time is set so that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is in the open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. Further, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing over the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used for the game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different).

As a result, the speed at which the game ball flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed slower than the speed of the game torrent in the game ball passage on the front side thereof. Further, as a mode for reducing the flow-down speed, the inclination angle may be loosened, or an inhibitory member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. Further, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning opening. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if a small hit occurs and the second large winning opening 35 is opened (a state in which the ball can be entered), the game ball that has flowed down enters the second starting opening 21 and is second. It is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35. Further, the third out opening 34c can also prevent the game ball that has flowed down to the side of the second special winning opening 35 from entering the second large winning opening 35.

The high base state does not have to activate all of the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol, the second starting port is more than when the function is not operating. It suffices if 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol. There is a possibility of trying to display the second special symbol in a variable manner without displaying it in a variable manner. That is, there is a possibility of trying to perform a right-handed game even in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state). However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Because it is set to, even if the 2nd special symbol is variablely displayed in the normal state (even if the ball is entered into the 3rd starting port 26), the variable display cannot be performed many times, and the game efficiency is very high. It's a bad thing. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol in a variable manner in the left-handed game than to display the second special symbol in a variable manner in the right-handed game. Here, "a state in which the first special symbol is not in the game (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". It means that it is. In addition, "a state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is "0". It means that.

Further, in a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, the frequency with which the second starting port 21 is opened is improved, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is increased by the first special symbol time saving function. Is shortened, and the efficiency of the right-handed game is improved. In such a case, it is more advantageous to perform the right-handed game to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct than to perform the left-handed game. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 than to enter the ball into the first starting port 20. Because it is. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21.

Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened by the second special symbol time saving function, and the game efficiency by the right-handed game is improved. In such a case, it is possible to proceed with the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol winning / failing determination which is advantageous for the player. Further, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), and the ball is executed based on the entry into the second starting port 21. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol changes for a long time (compared to the low probability low base state). Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol are not activated, so that the player enters the second starting port 21. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, a prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as in the high base state. However, instead, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment prevents the number of game balls from decreasing during the big hit due to the small hit (small hit probability: 420/630) that occurs with a high probability, and rather causes the small hit to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by (generating multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the ball enters the second starting port 21 by frequently causing the ball to enter the second starting port 21 by the right-handed game. Aim for the next big hit by the first special symbol hit / fail judgment without greatly reducing the number of balls held. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting opening 21, the game is played. The sphere does not increase (maintain). Further, in this embodiment, since about 75 to 85% of the right-handed game balls are set to enter the second starting port 21, the base is high unless the ball enters another entry port. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease, albeit slightly. Further, by adjusting the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the ball entry rate of the game ball into the second start port 21.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, a small hit is generated at a high frequency (420/630) by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 by the right-handed game, and the accuracy is high. While trying to increase the number of balls held in the small hit game during the low base state, the next big hit is aimed at by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the longer the period in which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period in the high-accuracy low-base state continues), the more small hits are generated. There are more opportunities (to perform a small hit game), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board configuration and game status]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first large winning opening 30, and the first large winning opening. The two starting openings 21 and the second winning opening 35 are arranged in the optimum order. Further, since the game ball flow passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when each of these winning openings is closed, about 90% of the game balls fired in the right game area 3B are , Passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first large winning opening 30, then flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then the second winning opening 35. It is configured to flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 and flow down to the out port 34. Then, if there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, the ball is entered into the winning opening, discharged from the winning opening to the back surface of the game board, and the entered game ball is placed in the game area downstream of the winning opening. It has a structure that is not available. Further, the remaining 10% that does not flow into the gate 28 side enters the second out port 34b provided on the upstream side of the gate 28 and is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. Further, by adjusting the angle of the game nail around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the inflow ratio of the game ball to the gate 28 side.

By arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is hindered from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes "0" and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all the game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not the other winning openings are opened. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering another winning opening.

When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened. Will be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so that the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through (1 second later), the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2 The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also set to be one time of 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. After that, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds is repeated (1 second closing → 6). Open for 0.0 seconds → Close for 1 second → Open for about 6.0 seconds → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the second starting port 21. It will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. In the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, in the high accuracy and high base state, there is a 1/63 probability of a big hit, no small hit, and a 62/63 probability of a loss.

First, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the open state after passing through the gate 28. The ball enters the second starting port 21 and other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching in front of the second starting port 21 and flow down to the third starting port 21 without flowing down to the second starting port 21. The ball enters 26 or flows into the first out port 34a. As a result, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is continuously (highly frequently) executed. In addition, since one prize ball is ejected by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the decrease speed of the possessed ball is reduced, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and the next big hit is made. It becomes possible to aim. In addition, one prize ball is also ejected by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

Next, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is a big hit, the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in a mode corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. .. Further, the second big winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball that flows down by the game to the right is smoothly entered into the first big winning opening without being hindered by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream from the first big winning opening 30, the second starting port 21 shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 is placed even in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the ball can be opened, the game ball that flows down the right game area during the big hit game enters the second start port 21 first, and does not enter the second start port 21. Only the second big winning opening 30 will enter the ball.

Moreover, since the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is one, the execution time of the jackpot game is only extended for a long time, and the player has no merit. Rather, there is a risk that the game will be redundant, will not proceed smoothly, and the game will be less enjoyable. Therefore, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation and smoothly proceed with the big hit game. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 when not during the big hit game. Absent.

Next, the high-accuracy low-base state will be described. The high-accuracy low-base state is a low-base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When a right-handed game is performed in a high-accuracy and low-base state, a determination as to whether or not the game ball first passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol hit / fail determination) is executed. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a longer time (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also lower than that in the high base state. Since it is set to (1/240), a little time after the game ball passes through the gate (3 seconds later), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 opens. It becomes a state. Since the probability of hitting is set to 1/240, it is almost possible that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state. In addition, instead of such an aspect, the probability of winning in the normal symbol hit / fail judgment in the low base state may be set to 0/240, and all the results may be out of order. In this way, the second starting port 21 will not be opened in the low base state. Similarly, the hit probability in the high base state is 239/240.

That is, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state is set to be very low, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 is set to the second starting port 21. The probability of entering the ball is low, and the possibility of reaching the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 through the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set high. The possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a small hit varies depending on whether it is in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 420/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit.

The game ball that flows down through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 and downstream of the first winning opening 30 is branched into a third starting port 26 side passage and a second starting port 21 side passage by a branching portion. When the game ball that has flowed into the passage on the side of the third starting port 26 enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, it is unlikely that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state even if the game ball passes through the gate 28, so that the game ball flowing into the passage on the second starting port 21 side is almost the same. All of them flow down to the second big winning opening 35 and the third out opening 34c provided downstream of the second starting opening 21 without entering the second starting opening 21.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination executed based on entering the third starting port 26 is a small hit, the second large winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened. , It is opened in the opening / closing mode for small hits shown in FIG. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has flowed into the passage on the side of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the closed second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning opening 35, and is opened by the small hit game. Enter the second big winning opening 35 which is.

Since the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, the balls are entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls held during the high accuracy and low base state. In addition, since the high-accuracy low-base state continues at least until the next big hit occurs due to the special symbol hit / fail judgment, the player can increase the number of balls held as the high-accuracy low-base state continues for a long period of time. It will be possible. In the high accuracy and high base state, the second special symbol time is shortened and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (the first special symbol long time state). The execution frequency of is higher than the execution frequency of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain about 20 prize balls (two balls) on average by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (many times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 in 10 times). Further, as a result, as the total winning balls in the "renso period" in which the right-handed game is continued, the winning balls of the small hit game can be added in addition to the winning balls of the big hit game, and a larger number of game balls can be obtained. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big hits (for big hits only), and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream from the second starting opening 21 (the most downstream of these) are for small hits (for small hits). It is said to be a big prize opening (only for small hits). Further, by arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small hits, downstream from the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 causes the second big winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second starting port 21 (time of opening state, fluctuation time of normal symbol, winning probability of normal symbol winning / failing determination), a high base state ( The high-probability low-base state is more likely than the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state) to allow the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), the first step is made. 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the low accuracy and high base state where the small hit game can occur, the second starting port 21 is configured so as not to be in the open state at all (may be a configuration in which the small hit is not opened at all). It is difficult to adjust the ball entry rate to the second large winning opening 35 when the game occurs by entering the ball into the second starting opening 21. Therefore, a third out port 34c (exhaust port) is provided between the second starting port 21 (first ball entry port) and the second big winning opening 35 (second ball entry port), and the third out port 34c (exhaust port) is provided. By making it possible to adjust the ball entry rate to the out opening 34c, the ball entry rate to the second major winning opening 35 can be adjusted.

Further, even in the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 to almost maintain the holding ball (including a slight increase or a slight decrease) (or the speed of the holding ball decrease is suppressed). (While), a state in which the game is played with the expectation that the result of the first special symbol winning / failing judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) (high base state), and a small game ball is inserted into the third starting port 26. A state in which the player plays with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) while increasing the number of balls held by entering the second big winning opening 35 when a hit occurs (high accuracy and low). (Base state), and has diversified playability. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game. For the player, the high-accuracy low-base state in which the number of balls held can be increased is more advantageous than the high-base state. In addition, while continuing the right-handed game, it is possible to shift between a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) and a high accuracy low base state. Diversify and enhance the interest of games.

Further, the start gate 29 is provided at the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by also being used as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is passed through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being blocked by the second starting port 21 or the like to pass through the start gate 29, and the jackpot game is started. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first large winning opening 30 and the first gate 28 may be provided. It is necessary to provide the 2 starting port 21, the 3rd starting port 26, and the 2nd big winning opening 35 upstream.

Further, when the right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the right-handed game should be fired. Further, when the left-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined mode to notify that the left-handed game should be fired. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is performed are "low accuracy low base state", "high accuracy low base state", and "high accuracy low base state". It is possible to control either "low accuracy high base state" or "high accuracy high base state", but among them, the low accuracy low base state is also called "normal gaming state", and the high accuracy low base state is called. Also called "specific gaming state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, statuses, and counters. Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". In addition, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is "general diagram", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special diagram 1" or "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be called "2" or "second special drawing".

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interrupt is enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. To do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, third start port sensor 26a) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. , The first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) reads the detection signal and stores it in the output buffer of the RAM as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

Next, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). As a result, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), start ball entry process (S205), normal figure operation process (S206), and special figure 1 operation process (S207), which will be described later. ), Special figure 2 operation process (S208), hold ball number process (S209), and power failure monitoring process (S210) are executed. After that, various other processes (S211) are executed to end the interrupt process (S105). Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the number of normal symbol hold provided in the RAM) is counted by the counter. It is determined whether or not the value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 in S301 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normally symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. Do and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number values (acquired information, ordinary figure acquisition information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol reserved balls in the ordinary figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a or the second start port sensor 21a. Judgment (S305). If it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically (S306), it is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure reservations) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number). Then, when it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. When it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and a random number related to special figure 1 is acquired. Process (S308) and proceed to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, and the random number for determining the jackpot type, which are stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (random number values shown in FIG. 7 (A)), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, special feature) are acquired. The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the third start port 26, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the third start port sensor 26a (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the third start opening 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the third starting port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reserved, specifically the main control). It is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold) provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (S311), and it is related to Special Figure 2. Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing is completed.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number value), and those acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
Next, the process at the time of starting and entering the ball (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the start ball entry process (S205) after the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start-in / entering ball processing (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by “1” (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit is read (acquired information). S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the acquired random number values read out, the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) is a big hit according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether or not it is out of order (preliminary determination), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (pre-judgment) by S317 is a pre-judgment (so-called "hold look-ahead") in which the hit / fail judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) for the special figure 2 hold is performed prior to the hit / fail judgment in the special figure 2 hit / fail judgment process described later. ").

The pre-judgment as to whether or not it is a big hit can be made in the big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A), that is, in the high probability state, the big hit judgment table for the high probability state, or in the normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-judgment mode, as a fluctuation pattern information judgment table capable of judging fluctuation pattern information, a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern information determination table of the above is provided. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to do. Then, from the selected fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary judgment information) related to the result of the judgment by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the jackpot judgment value (big hit information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random value for determining the jackpot type) (big hit type information), information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the small hit determination value (small hit information) ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random value) is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). As the special figure 2 start entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S316 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted as it is. Is not transmitted as it is, but the game information acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information) may be transmitted.

Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start-in ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a big hit, what kind of big hit is, and the information related to a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is judged in a high probability state, and low. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as a hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the command is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored in.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not among the random number values read by S316 is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (big hit). Command data including information indicating the value of the random number value for determining the type) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the information indicating the result of the pre-judgment are generated as the special figure 2 start entry command, and this is generated. Can be set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the above-described processing according to Special Figure 2 (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S321). Pre-determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this pre-determination is generated as the special figure 1 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The preliminary determination (holding look-ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the accuracy determination in the special figure 1 accuracy determination process described later.

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal figure operation process (S206), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) is performed, and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. The process (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The normal figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in S501 that it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed, then the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (S505), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Ordinary symbol winning / failing judgment processing]
Next, the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination) among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the high-probability normal-figure hit / fail judgment based on the values "0" to "238"), it is determined whether the value is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, in S602, when the state B flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the base state is low (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the table (hit judgment value is "0" to "119"), it is determined whether or not the hit is a hit by the low-probability normal figure hit / miss judgment (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be a miss (NO in S605), the stop display is missed. Determine the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the ordinary) (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per stop display (design per normal figure) is determined (S607), and the normal figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Ordinary symbol random number shift processing]
Next, the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or off normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not is performed (S804), and the process is completed.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
Next, the ordinary symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). When it is determined that the normal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). When it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), shift to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening patterns for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) are for states A and C (for low base states). Set the pattern (S906) and move to S904. The opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). When it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), and the opening time has not been reached. If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), the control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after opening the second starting port 21 in advance. If it is determined (whether or not the specified opening time has passed) (S1005) and it is determined that it is not the closing time of the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process is terminated. When it is determined by S1005 that it is time to close the second starting port (YES in S1005), the process of closing (closing) the second starting port 21 is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is "0" (S1008). When it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is terminated as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing for hitting the normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag for hitting the normal figure is set (S1008). S1010), finish the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the state B (high base state), and the state A. And even in the state C (low base state), it becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened three times. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. , Turn off the normal figure hit end flag (S1011), turn off the normal figure hit flag (S1012), set the normal figure operation status to "1" (S1013), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) after the normal figure operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1101, YES for S1103), special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) is performed, and when "Special figure 1 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105) ), Perform special symbol 1 confirmation processing (S1106), and if "Special symbol 1 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, S1105, YES for S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory process 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the process is completed. The operation status of Special Figure 1 is "1" by default. Further, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the special electric accessory process 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric accessory process 2 as a small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1) is "0" (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0", that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not in the game (NO in S1207), the process is in progress to set the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers). If it is determined whether or not (S1208) and it is determined that the standby screen is in progress (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not in progress (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

Further, in S1201, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0", that is, one or more random number counter values acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 are stored (in S1201). NO), the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not in the game" means that special figure 2 is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0". Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed either.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
Next, the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the special figure 1 pass / fail determination process (S1203), first, as a determination value, the determination value is stored in the lowest region of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct (in the oldest memory) is read out (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (S1602). When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol does not determine whether it is a big hit, but a small hit or a small hit. It is considered to be one of the deviations (that is, it is not judged as a big hit). Since there is no small hit as a result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, when the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed during that period is All will be off. When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol is not executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, Determine if it is in a high probability state (S1603). When it is determined in S1603 that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) The hit / fail judgment is made based on the table (big hit judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), the hit / fail determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "5", "7", "311", "313", "317", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-). AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) (S1608), and the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609). Fig. 1 Turn on the jackpot fluctuation flag (S1610) and finish the process. In the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Further, when it is determined as a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1), one of the 15R first big hit, the 4R second big hit, the 4R third big hit, and the 4R fourth big hit is executed. .. If the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined to be a big hit, either the 15R 5th big hit, the 2R 6th big hit, or the 2R 7th big hit is executed (Fig. 8 (B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is not "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off-design is determined (S1607), and the processing is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot fluctuation flag, the first jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. And a second jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 The flag corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of is set. Further, as the small hit fluctuation flag, a second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the small hit (variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is displayed. A flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the jackpot is being displayed), in the other special symbol hit / fail determination, a process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed. Not performed. That is, control is not performed so that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) after the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the state A (whether or not it is the low probability low base state) (S1701). Then, when it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. When it is determined (YES in S1702), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to in the state A jackpot table (the portion corresponding to the status A and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Select a variation pattern based on (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of the fluctuation time is selected depending on the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). When it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number out table (state A and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 and the number of holds The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the parts corresponding to 1 and 2). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 are selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in 9 (the portion corresponding to the state A and the number of pending numbers 3 and 4). As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". Fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low accuracy low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). Is determined (S1708). When it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1708). (YES in S1709), refer to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to state B and jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), and fluctuate based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1710). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P15 to P16 are selected. When it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B deviation table (the part corresponding to the state B and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P17 to P19 are selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high accuracy low base state) (NO in S1708). Then, when it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1712) and it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C jackpot fluctuation table (in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown (S1710). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P23 is selected. When it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C deviation table (the part corresponding to the state C and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P24 is selected.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is completed. In the other processing (S1704), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern designation command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 processing during change]
Next, the special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. 27. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). When it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process shifts to the processing of S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). When it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the state B (high base state). Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). When it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low accuracy high base state, it shifts to a low accuracy low base state (normal state). In the high accuracy and high base state, "10000" is set in the state B counter, so that the value of the state B counter is substantially "0" even if the counter is subtracted for each fluctuation. Absent. That is, the high accuracy and high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped at the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S1909) and finish the process.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performing the variable display when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the variable display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 of the above and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game is completed. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the hit / fail determination process or the variation display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), and then the special figure 1 is specified. FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to Special FIG. 2 is being executed (S2902). When it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is (S2909). When it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process ends. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and when it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 Turn on the interruption flag (S2903), interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time in Special Figure 1 (S2904), and finish the process. As a result, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Further, in S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). When it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or the small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned off. (S2907), special figure 1 The measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the processing is completed. As a result, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (time measurement of the fluctuation time) can be resumed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, the special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and the second special symbol A flag having a special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as a “second interruption flag”) indicating that the fluctuation display is being interrupted, and corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. 29. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), and the first Turn on the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating the execution of the jackpot game related to the special symbol (S2003), and shift to the processing of S2004. As a result, in Special Figure 1, it can be shown that the variable display related to the big hit is finished (the big hit is confirmed) and the game shifts to the big hit game.

In S2004, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a 15R jackpot (S2004), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2004), a round to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening once per round) Set "15" to the value of the round counter that counts the number of times (from opening to closing of the big winning opening in one round) (S2005), and set the big hit opening command to start the big hit game (S2006). ), Set the operation status of Special Figure 1 to "4" (S2007), and finish the process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S2004), the jackpot type is a 4R jackpot, so "4" is set in the value of the round counter (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2006. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended. As a result, the jackpot standby state is set. In addition, when it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the fluctuation display is related to the deviation, so the special figure 1 operation status. Is set to "1" (S2009), and the process is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot flag, the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed (“1st jackpot”). (Also referred to as "flag") and the special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as a "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R second big hit is achieved, the display mode is such as "2R Δ4R ▲ 15R Δ" (for example, ▲: lighting, Δ: extinguishing). Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process shown in FIGS. 21 to 29 (S211) Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206) etc., the description will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 21. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can execute variable display in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the 1st special symbol hold and the digestion of the 2nd special symbol hold ("Variation display of the 1st special symbol and the variation display of the 2nd special symbol", "1st special symbol hit / miss judgment and 2nd special symbol" It is said that the hit / fail judgment and ") can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port (the second special symbol hit / miss judgment) is the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port (the first special symbol hit / miss). It is more likely to be a jackpot with a large profit (a large amount of profit that can be obtained) for the player than the judgment) (FIG. 8 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) is divided into five stages. It is divided and "Special Figure 2 Operation Status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1151, YES for S1153), perform special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1151 and S1153, YES for S1155) ), Perform special symbol 2 confirmation processing (S1156), and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1151, S1153, S1155, YES for S1157), special electric as a big hit game If the character processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, and S1157 are NO), the special electric character processing as a small hit game is performed. 2 (S1109) is performed. The operation status of Special Figure 2 is "1" by default. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) is Special figure 2 Only the operation process (S211) is processed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment enables the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed in parallel, but the jackpot game and the first special symbol related to the first special symbol are executed. This is because it is impossible to execute (only one of them can be executed) in parallel with the big hit game related to the special symbol. In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, but as another embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
Since the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, description thereof will be omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. 23. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) is set. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment has a small hit, when it is judged that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is not a big hit (NO in S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol It is determined whether the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined in S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is completed. Other processing is the same as that of the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, it is based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. And select the fluctuation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, the variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

Further, in the state C, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol (determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the state C, there are more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) of the second special symbol than fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol, and variation patterns of various times (which can execute various game effects) are selected. It is possible. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol is lowered. On the other hand, in the state A and the state B, the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the first special symbol (the first special symbol winning / failing determination). Therefore, in the states A and B, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, and various time (various game effects) can be produced. The variable pattern (which can be executed) can be selected. Therefore, in the states A and B, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (there are few types). Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered.

Further, since the states A and B are game states in which the game is mainly performed by displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the second special symbol is disabled and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. It has been set for a long time. Specifically, when the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed in the states A and B, the variation display time of the second special symbol is set to 110 seconds when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. (P12 or P20). This is set to a fluctuation time shorter than the longest fluctuation time set as the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit in the state A. Further, in the state B, the fluctuation time is set to be shorter than the longest fluctuation time set as the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit.

In the states A and B, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is not the main hit / fail judgment, but if an excessively long fluctuation time is set, the player who made the hit / fail judgment himself / herself executes the jackpot game related to the jackpot. There is a possibility that the game will end. Therefore, if a big hit is obtained as a result of the hit / fail judgment, the fluctuation time (the longest one) set in the main first special symbol is not set unnecessarily for a long time. Set a shorter fluctuation time. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the player is set a variable time in which the player can wait, and the player is inflicted with a disadvantage that the profit from the big hit that he has earned cannot be obtained. Absent. In addition, since it is unlikely that a big hit will occur and the profit that can be obtained is large, such control is used.

Further, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 1000 seconds (P13 or P21). This is set to a longer fluctuation time than the longest fluctuation time that can be set to the first special symbol that is the main body in the state A. Further, the fluctuation time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set in the first special symbol that is the main body in the state B. Of the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in states A and B, the case where the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit is longer than the fluctuation display time when it is a big hit or a miss. Set.

Since the states A and B are mainly based on the first special symbol winning / failing determination that does not have a small hit in the result of the winning / failing determination, it is not desirable that the small hits occur frequently by executing the second special symbol winning / failing determination. In addition, if there is a situation in which small hits can occur frequently, a malicious player executes the second special symbol hit / fail judgment even though the game state is mainly based on the first special symbol hit / fail judgment. There is a risk that a small hit will result in a game profit. For example, in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed, there is a risk that a game profit may be unreasonably obtained by an inappropriate game, such as by performing a right-handed game. In order to prevent such a situation, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment that is not the main body is a small hit, the fluctuation time is set to a long time (the longest time). It prevents small hits (small hit games) from occurring frequently. Further, since the game profit that can be obtained by one small hit game is not so large, it does not cause much damage to the player who generated the small hit.

Further, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is wrong, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds (P14 or P22). This is set to a longer fluctuation time than the longest fluctuation time that can be set to the first special symbol that is the main body in the state A. Further, the fluctuation time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set in the first special symbol that is the main body in the state B. In addition, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol that is not the main body in the states A and B is shorter than when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and longer than when it is a big hit. Set to. When the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, by setting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to a long time, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered, and the left-handed game should be performed. , Prevent the player from playing an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game. As another aspect, the jackpot and the miss may have the same fluctuation time (for example, both may be 110 seconds, and both may be 600 seconds).

In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, another process (S1404) is performed to finish this process. In the other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern designation command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when stored up to the upper limit number). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. To do.

[Special symbol 2 processing during change]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is processed (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. 27. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 determination process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) includes a big hit type (round counter setting process) and a special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, the jackpot game start process described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to the process of S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that turns ON when the player launches the game ball into the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing in the jackpot standby state and passes the game ball through the start gate 29. .. After the special symbol is displayed as a fixed stop with the jackpot symbol and becomes a jackpot, the jackpot start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the jackpot game proceeds (the round game starts). Here, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the gaming machine is maintained in the big hit standby state in which the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take a break such as a toilet, a drink, or a telephone. Then, after the break is completed, the game ball is launched at an arbitrary timing of the player, and the game ball is passed through the start gate 29, so that the big hit game can proceed. Further, the jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the jackpot winning device (first jackpot winning device 31) has been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

When it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), is it the time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, is it time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Or, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If S2105 determines that it is not the start time of the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the large winning opening processing is performed (S2107), and the processing is completed. As a result, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of big hit.

If it is determined by S2104 that the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is open (YES in S2104), the maximum number of balls that can be entered into the large winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls (this implementation). In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 30), that is, the large winning opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening time (S2112). If it is determined by S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or when it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112). That is, when it is determined that any of the two round end conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is closed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). When it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) as the jackpot end process to end the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending period. (S2117), turn on the jackpot end flag (S2118), and finish the process. Further, when it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has been completed, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122). , The jackpot start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is completed.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 has not yet passed in the jackpot standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability change flag is set to OFF (S2102), and S2154 Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103), and when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104) and the process proceeds to S2156. .. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

If it is determined in S2152 that the probability change flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning off the probability change flag. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed the start gate (YES in S2156), the jackpot game is started (the round game is opened). Turn on the jackpot start flag (S2157) and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the gate has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine continues in the jackpot standby state. Further, when it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (advance) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game completed this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, five types of 15R first jackpot, 4R second jackpot, 4R third jackpot, 15R fifth jackpot, and 4R sixth jackpot are set as probabilistic jackpots, and in S2201, the jackpot games are these. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to any of the five types. Then, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot has ended this time (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and then the completed jackpot game is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 4R 6th jackpot. Determine if it exists (S2203).

When it is determined in S2203 that the completed jackpot game is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 4R 6th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and "10000" is set in the state B counter. Set (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, a high base state of up to 10,000 times is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the high accuracy high base state is obtained. It is not possible to execute the variable display of the special symbol 10,000 times during the business hours of the game store, so by setting "10000" to the status B counter, the next big hit will actually occur. It means that the high base state (state B) is continued until. It should be noted that the control may be changed to maintain the high base state (state) until the next big hit occurs by changing the number of times such as “10000” times in the state B.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the completed jackpot game is neither the 4R 3rd jackpot nor the 4R 6th jackpot (NO in S2203), that is, the completed jackpot game is the 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, Or, if it is determined that it is one of the 15R 5th jackpots (NO in S2203), the process ends with the state B flag turned off. As a result, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high-accuracy low-base state.

When it is determined in S2201 that the end is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), the state B flag is turned ON (S2206), and the status B counter is set. Set "100" (S2207) and finish the process. As a result, the high base state of 100 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and the low accuracy high base state is obtained.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the item is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), Turn off the special figure 2 jackpot flag (S3004), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3005), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the large winning device (second large winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If S2302 determines that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the big winning opening (2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the time of the interval between the multiple opening operations has elapsed (S2303). .. Regarding the small hit game, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time elapses after the fixed stop display of the small hit symbol is displayed regardless of the passage of the start gate. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit.

If S2303 determines that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when S2303 determines that it is time to open the large winning opening (YES in S2303), the second large winning opening 35 is opened according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). To finish. When it is determined by S2302 that the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the opening operation of 6 times, that is, 6 times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined by S2306 that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is time to close the big prize opening, that is, after opening the big winning opening, the predetermined number It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the specified number of entering balls (10) (YES in S2306), the large winning opening (second large prize) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process shifts to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is set. One decrement is performed (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). When it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the next opening operation is started, so the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. In S2311, as the small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the small hit ending command is set (S2311), the small hit ending period is started (S2312), the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the small hit end flag is set. Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened 6 times.

In addition, when it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation of 6 times has been completed (or a specified number of game balls have been entered). If it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has elapsed (S2315) and it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process is completed. By generating a small hit game in a high accuracy and low base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, which enhances the game's interest. At the start of the small hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF, and are not switched from OFF to ON. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. If it is determined that it is related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is performed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. In this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit flag is not turned ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101). ), Turn off the special figure 2 small hit flag (S3104), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3105), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Holded ball number processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) after the special drawing 2 operation processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out ( S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is completed.

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S210) after the hold ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 46, in the power failure monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of the power failure signal (S2601), and when it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined by S2601 that there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is a hit game, the number of reserved balls is several, the probability change / time reduction Data related to (the number of remaining fluctuations is several, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristic configuration, and thus has a unique effect not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or is compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a big hit in the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct (the first special symbol (also referred to as "first information") or the second special symbol (also referred to as "second information") is a big hit. A high-probability state occurs (a privilege is given) based on a symbol (also referred to as a "specific display mode"), and a high-probability state (a privilege) is satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is supposed to end.

The process of granting this high-probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as "privilege granting means". It should be noted that the first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variation display and the stop display are performed to show the same pass / fail judgment result. , "The special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit effect symbol (specific display mode)". ..

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, the CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed after that. Further, in the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 is also subjected to the same processing as the power supply cutoff monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11, and the power supply cutoff signal is generated due to a power failure or the like. When it is turned on, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, the data related to the effect control when a power failure such as a power failure occurs is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) after the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. The state of is returned to the state before the power failure occurred.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random number for determining the effect includes a random number for determining the variable effect that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, a random number for determining the advance notice effect that determines the advance notice effect, and a random number for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. There are random numbers and so on. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random numbers may not be added one by one, but may be added two by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern, which will be described later, is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub-output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are controlled by the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp. Among the boards 107, the command is transmitted to the control board to which the corresponding command is transmitted. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Direction design game production, special game production related to hit game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of the effect symbols and the like executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. It is also possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, control the sound output from the speaker, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91 is determined. Judge (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. .. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, the lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting the lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 to emit light, and the drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203) is performed. The lamp data and the drive data are created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process (S4303) is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the start entry command has not been received (NO in S4401). , When it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the process shifts to the process of S4403, and the effect hold information storage process (S4402) is performed to shift to the process of S4403. The effect hold information storage process (S4402) is a random operation for determining the jackpot type (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination) included in the start-in ball command (special figure 1 start-in ball command or special figure 2 start-in ball command) received in S4401. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation patterns random values) according to the type of special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , It is stored in a predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in the shift memory format. For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the number of reserved balls "4" in the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as the special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub-control board 90 is the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also a “acquisition information storage means”.

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start processing (YES) described later ( S4404) is performed to shift to the processing of S4405, and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the processing shifts to the processing of S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect start processing. In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to display the variation effect. The variable effect end process to be terminated is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect symbol 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop display is displayed, and the variable effect (effect pattern game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process shifts to the processing of S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end processing. The variable effect refers to various effects performed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Subsequently, the S4407 determines whether or not a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (generation of big hit). ), The opening command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, the ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big prize opening in the round game The 1st big winning opening command sent based on the entry to 30 and the 2nd big winning opening entry command sent based on the entry to the 2nd big winning opening in the small hit game are applicable. .. The S4407 determines whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if it has not been received (NO in S4407), it shifts to the processing of S4409 and if it has been received (YES in S4407). , Performs processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies the opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is a round start command, the command is concerned. Set a round effect command in the sub output buffer to specify the round effect according to the round specified based on, and if it is an ending command, specify the ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a big winning opening command (1st big winning opening command, 2nd big winning opening entry command), the big winning opening (1st big winning) specified based on the command A ball entry command that specifies the entry effect according to the entry into the opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When various effect commands related to the set hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect and a round according to the progress of the hit game. The effect, the ball entry effect, and the like are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the processing of S4409 is performed, and this processing is completed. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other reception commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the above-mentioned various commands is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4404) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the variation effect start process (S4404), first, the effect determination random number process (S4501) is performed to acquire various effect determination random numbers such as the variation effect determination random number, the advance notice effect determination random number, and the effect symbol determination random number. In this embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the advance notice effect (including the presence or absence of the advance notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

Next, the S4502 analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information for designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the fluctuation pattern designation command includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current game state, and the determination of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. The result, symbol information for specifying the jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are two types of variable pattern designation commands, one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variable pattern designation command, the effect symbol game production to be started this time is performed. It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. It should be noted that the variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the production mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the production mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the production mode C, and the mode status "4" corresponds to the production mode C. It corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly using the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. .. Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as different aspects of the effect symbol 8 (for example, symbol design, number design, etc.), different characters, items, and background images. It will be different. In addition, the effect design game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode, and when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. Can be. In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the low accuracy and low base state, the effect modes C and D are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the high accuracy and low base state, and the effect mode E is executed. Is executed when controlled to the low accuracy high base state and when controlled to the high accuracy high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any of A to D, the player confirms the effect mode to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy low base state or the high accuracy low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the effect mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state even if the effect mode is confirmed. is there. In that sense, the effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in the S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are used, and the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern, effect pattern) controlled mainly by the sub control unit 90. A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining the game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used and the advance notice effect determination table are set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80. .. That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and advance notice effect determination table are set from them based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as the variation effect pattern determination table at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode. A variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (variable mode of the effect symbol, etc.) of the effect symbol game effect, and is a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from those variable effect pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variation effect acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed mainly in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach-existing effect symbol game effect) or when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character When the production is not executed (reach no production design game production), etc. are determined. In the reach effect, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). When the mode (big hit mode, specific display mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop display (temporarily stop) with the symbols (same effect symbol) constituting the jackpot mode. Whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol (three same effect symbols) that completes the jackpot mode while the remaining one continues to be variable display (scroll display). It is a production that shows whether or not. At this time, the game effect is executed using the predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode is determined by whether or not the predetermined character achieves the predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show it in the production of. Such a game production (reach production or character production described later) can also be referred to as a story production (specific game production) or a purpose production (specific game production). This makes it possible to raise the player's expectation for a big hit and enhance the game's interest.

Further, in S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). Production symbol The production symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game production is out of the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, and if there is a reach, there are three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787". One of the production symbols is considered to be different from the other production symbols, and when there is no reach, at least one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" is the other. It is said that the production pattern is different

Further, in S4506, the advance notice effect to be executed according to the variable effect pattern (effect pattern game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as a production design game production including this execution notice production. This notice effect shows the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect being executed is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode before the effect symbol is stopped or displayed (fixed stop display) (during the variable display of the effect symbol). Notification production). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect acquired in S4501 and the advance notice effect determination table set in S4504, the specified variation pattern and the advance notice effect matching the determined variation effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the advance notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect and the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable production start process is completed. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, the outline of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) of this embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a of. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured.

In principle, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is a vertically scrolled display of the symbols in the order of "1"-> "2"-> "3" ...-> "7"-> "8"-> "9" (ascending order). (Vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and repeats vertical scrolling. The mode of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the variation effect pattern determination table described above. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various modes of variable display, such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. The mode can be provided as a variable effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variablely displayed in descending order. Further, it is also possible to set the mode of variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. However, in this embodiment, when the variation display is stopped. It has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop modes, (1) the stop order (also referred to as "stop order") of each of the effects symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is "left symbol". → Stop mode in which the middle symbol → right symbol (also referred to as “first stop mode”) and (2) Stop mode in which the stop order of each symbol is “left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol” (“1st stop mode”) (Also referred to as "second stop mode") and (3) stop mode (also referred to as "third stop mode") in which all stop timings (stop timings) of each symbol are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop"). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a "fourth stop mode") in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same and the middle symbol is stopped after that. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and the change effect pattern selected (set) in S4505 determines in which stop mode the variation display is stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). The stop symbol with the first stop order is also called the "first stop symbol", the stop symbol with the second stop order is also called the "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol with the third stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also called a "third stop symbol" or a "final stop symbol".

Of the first to fourth stop modes, in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “small” mainly in the effect mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the "hit".

In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit” mainly in (1) effect modes A and B (state A). When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the above, (2) the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit" in the effect mode E (state B). When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”), and (3) effect mode C (3) In the state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation or the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing" or "big hit", the variation display is performed. It is a stop mode that can be executed at the time of stop.

The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly in the situation where (1) the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls of the special figure works in the production modes A and B (state A) (at the start of fluctuation). Special figure 1 When the number of reserved balls is "3" or "4"), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing", and based on this, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation. , (2) In the effect mode E (state B), the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing", and (3). ) In the effect mode C (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing", the variation display is stopped. This is a feasible stop mode.

In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit" mainly in (1) effect mode C (state C). When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation based on the existence, and (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit". This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display is stopped when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation based on the above.

In this way, a plurality of stop modes for stopping the variation display of the effect symbol 8 are provided according to the effect mode (game state), the variation display mode based on the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, and the result (stop display mode). Therefore, it is possible to make the stopping mode different and diversified according to the situation of the game. Further, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped, it is possible to infer the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be displayed (derived display) thereafter. It becomes possible, and it is also possible to infer the type of special game that can be executed, the presence / absence of the execution, the possibility, and the like through the stop mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stopping mode when the variable display is stopped, and to arouse the expectation for the subsequent special game.

In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is "right symbol-> left symbol-> middle symbol" (fifth stop mode). ), And various stop modes such as a stop mode in which the left symbol and the middle symbol are stopped at substantially the same stop time and the right symbol is stopped after that (sixth stop mode), and each stop can be provided. The conditions under which the embodiment is executed are not limited to this embodiment, and can be variously defined.

Further, in this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. This symbol type corresponds to the game state (effect mode). Specifically, in the state A (effect modes A and B), "7" among the odd-numbered symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "red symbol"), and other odd-numbered symbols "1" and "3". , "5" and "9" are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"), and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6" and "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter "blue"). It is also called "design"). On the other hand, in states B and C (effect modes C, D and E), among the odd-numbered symbols, "3", "5" and "7" are red symbols, and the other odd-numbered symbols are "1" and "9". Is a green symbol, and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols.

It should be noted that the correspondence between the design and the color shown in this embodiment is merely an example, and it is possible to adopt a correspondence relationship other than this, and the type of color is not limited to this embodiment, and other colors are used. Can be used. Further, in this embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by the color, but it can also be determined by an element other than the color. For example, the type of character when a character is attached to the effect symbol, and the number symbol when there is an effect symbol (character symbol) representing a predetermined character in addition to the effect symbol (number symbol) representing a number. The symbol type may be determined by the character symbol, and further, the symbol type may be determined simply by the odd symbol and the even symbol.

The variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derivated display) when the variation display is stopped according to the above-mentioned stop mode is used. The result of the fluctuation display is notified. In this embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), there are "completely disjointed eyes" ("124", etc.) in which all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are different symbols (numbers), and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and production symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining production symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (number). ) Is an out-of-order mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of the winning game. On the other hand, the "doublet" ("777", etc.) in which all three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same is the jackpot mode (specific display mode) that triggers the execution of the jackpot game (see FIG. 6) of 4R or more. It is supposed to be.

On the premise of such a basic combination of symbols, in this embodiment, the "reach barrage" among the loose stitches is also used as the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). .. This is because the number of prize balls that the player can acquire (the number of prize balls won) is smaller in the 2R jackpot game than in the 4R or higher jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and the state C (high). It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it more difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase the number of balls held) in a small hit game than (probability low base state), that is, for the player. This is because it is a special game with a relatively low degree of advantage (profit amount). Further, among the loose stitches, the "completely loose stitch" is also used as the small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). This is because, as described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the time, so that the small hit large winning opening (second) located on the downstream side of the second starting port 21. This is because it is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely that a small hit will be profitable (nearly zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Further, among the loose stitches, the "specific loose stitch" described later is set as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high accuracy and low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific disparity) is also referred to as a "first display mode", and the big hit mode (doublet) is also referred to as a "second display mode", and the disengagement mode (complete disparity, reach disparity). Of the (eyes), the reach-separated number is also referred to as a "third display mode", and among the out-of-order modes (completely disjointed eyes, reach disjointed eyes), the completely disjointed eye is also referred to as a "fourth display mode".

Since the state A (low probability low base state) is a game state in which a left-handed game is basically performed, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (the first) based mainly on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 20. 1 Special symbol variation display) is performed, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (second special symbol variation display) is rarely performed during the variation display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made under such circumstances, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation is caused by the effect display 102. Only display (and stop display) is to be performed. Similarly, the state B (high base state) is a game state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, and the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (first special) mainly based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21. (Fluctuation display of symbols) is performed, and it is rare that the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed during the variation display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made below, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display by the effect display 102 ( And stop display).

Similarly, since the state C (high accuracy and low base state) is a game state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment mainly based on the entry into the third starting port 26 ( The second special symbol variation display) is performed, and the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (first special symbol variation display) is rarely performed during the variation display of the second special symbol. When the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made under such a situation, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but is performed by the effect display 102. Only variable display (and stop display) is to be performed.

However, when a special symbol hit / fail judgment contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a judgment result of "big hit" is obtained (for example, in the state C, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. (When a big hit is made), one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect suggesting the occurrence of the big hit. Do. As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect display is performed in parallel with the variation display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit and misses the opportunity to earn a profit.

[Other aspects]
Further, in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state is a specification that continues until the next big hit occurs. When the game state after the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state by changing to such a big hit type, or in addition to such a big hit type, a predetermined number of times in the high accuracy high base state. If the jackpot is not reached until the variation display of the special symbol (50 or 100) is completed, a jackpot type may be provided in which the gaming state changes to the high accuracy and low base state. By providing such a big hit type, the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a high base state, and when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times in the high base state, it depends on the big hit type and then. The game state has a case of shifting to a low-accuracy low-base state, a case of continuing the high-accuracy high-base state, and a case of shifting to a high-accuracy low-base state.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the changing mode (transition mode) of the gaming state, enhance the game playability, and enhance the gaming interest. In addition, by executing a common game effect in a high base state from the end of the big hit game to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times, the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which gaming state the player will shift to after the execution of. As a result, the player's playing interest in the high base state is enhanced, and the expectation for the advantageous state is increased. Further, as a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is not the high-accuracy low-base state but the high-accuracy low-base state, the game state changes to the high-accuracy low-base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It will be possible to play the game in anticipation of. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment for a long period of time.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b) and the second special symbol display (variable state display 49 c1 and c2). ) Are all displayed and controlled by the main control unit. Instead of this mode, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second special symbol display (variation). The display control of c1 and c2) of the status display 49 may be performed by another control unit such as a sub control unit. As a result, even if a problem occurs in the display control of one control unit, if the display control of the other control is appropriate, it is possible to notify the correct game information. Further, the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display are both provided on the same display unit (main display 40). As a result, the first special symbol display controlled by the main control unit and the second special symbol display controlled by the sub control unit are provided in the vicinity, and the consistency of the display contents of both can be confirmed and the display control is performed. It is possible to easily confirm that there is no problem with.

Similarly, in the first embodiment, the display control of both the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49) is performed by the main control unit. I decided to do it. In this mode, the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49) is sub-controlled. The display may be controlled by another control unit such as a unit. As a result, the same effect as that of the special symbol display described above is obtained.

Further, in addition to the second special symbol display and the second ordinary symbol display, a second first special symbol hold indicator (not shown), a second second special symbol hold indicator, and a second normal figure are not shown. A hold indicator may be provided. At this time, the first special figure hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, 2nd special figure hold indicator 43b) and the second normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42) are mainly controlled. The display is controlled by the unit, and the second special figure hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator, second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator are controlled by other control units such as the sub-control unit. It may be controlled by. In addition, these, the first special figure hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), the first normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42), the first The second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator may be provided on the same main indicator 40. it can. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of the two, easily confirm the consistency of the displayed contents, and easily confirm whether or not there is a problem in the display control.

In addition, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), the first ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), and the first special symbol hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, 2nd special figure hold indicator 43b), 1st normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42), 2nd special symbol indicator (variable state indicator 49) C1 and c2), the second ordinary symbol indicator (variable state indicator 49 c3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure) The hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator may all be provided on the same main indicator 40. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of these display units and easily confirm whether or not there is a problem in the display control by the main control unit and the display control by the sub control. Further, the main display 40 can be provided on the outside (outside) of the game area 3. Further, it can be provided on the game board 2 on the outside (outside) of the game area 3.

In addition, if the power is cut off (power cut) for some reason during the game or the game machine is operating (power is on), the display is controlled by the main control unit when the power is supplied again. Special symbol display (1st special symbol display 41a and 2nd special symbol display 41b), 1st ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), 1st special symbol hold indicator (1st special) The figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), and the first normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42) first execute display (display control) (restart and return). , The second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49), and the second special figure whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. The hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator later execute (restart, return) display (display control). ..

However, the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuating state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuating state display 49), and the second feature whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. The figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator are image display devices whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. The display (display control) is executed (restarted and restored) before (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and / and the third image display device 72). This is a simple display control in which the main display lights, turns off, and blinks a single LED, respectively, while the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or /, and so on. This is because the 3 image display device 72) is composed of a liquid crystal display unit and has a more complicated display control than the main display device.

As a result, even if the display unit shows the special symbol hit / miss judgment result or the fluctuation state controlled by the same sub-control unit, the first sub-display unit that quickly returns the display after the power is turned on again (after the power is restored) And a second sub-display unit that returns the display with a delay after that. Then, depending on each role, it becomes possible to execute the optimum game control. The first sub-display unit includes a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49) and a second normal symbol display (variable state display 49) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. C3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), and the second normal figure hold indicator are applicable and simple. With the display control, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state and the like, and it is possible to quickly recover after the power is turned on again. Further, the second sub-display unit corresponds to an image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or /, and third image display device 72) whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. However, with complicated display control, various game information and game effects (reach effect, notice effect, story effect, etc.) can be displayed, and it is possible to improve the taste by various game effects.

Further, in still another aspect, if the power is cut off (power cut) for some reason during the game or the game machine is operating (power is on), when the power is supplied again, the sub-control unit causes the sub-control unit. The second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), and the second special symbol hold display (second) whose display is controlled. 2 1st special figure hold indicator, 2nd 2nd special figure hold indicator), 2nd normal figure hold indicator first executes (restarts, returns) display (display control), and the main control unit First special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), first ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), first special symbol whose display is controlled by The hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b) and the first normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42) later execute (restart) display (display control). , And the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or / and third image display device 72) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit is further displayed (display control). ) May be executed (restart, return).

[Structure of right game area 3B]
Next, the configuration of the right game area 3B of the board surface (game area 3) of the game board 2 according to the first embodiment will be described in detail. As described above, the game area 3 of this embodiment is roughly divided into a left game area 3A (first game area, first area) and a right game area 3B (second game area, second area) ( (See FIG. 3). The player operates the firing handle 60 to perform the game, and adjusts the firing intensity of the gaming ball so that the gaming ball is launched with a firing intensity suitable for the gaming state at that time. Specifically, when the game state is the state A (low probability low base state), the firing handle 60 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the strength at which the game ball flows down the left game area 3A (first firing strength). Adjust to and launch the game ball. It is left-handed (first operation mode) to launch the game ball with the first launch intensity in this way. On the other hand, when the gaming state is state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) and state C (high accuracy low base state), the firing handle 60 is rotated clockwise to the limit (maximum). Then, the game ball is launched by adjusting the strength at which the game ball flows down the right game area 3B (second firing strength). In this way, right-handed (second operation mode) is to launch the game ball with the second firing intensity. Since the right-handed firing intensity (second firing intensity) is larger than the left-handed firing intensity (first firing intensity), the game ball is launched more vigorously than the left-handed firing intensity.

As shown in FIG. 53, the game ball launched by right-handed hitting (second firing intensity) passes through the central uppermost portion (apex) of the game area 3 and enters the right game area 3B. The game ball that has entered the right game area 3B first reaches above the gate 28 (passage port), but a second out port 34b is provided at the upper right of the gate 28, and the branch portion 301 above the gate 28 , The flow path of the game ball is supposed to branch to the gate 28 side and the second out port 34b side. That is, on the game board 2, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, the second big winning opening 35, and the third starting opening are the paths (flowing paths) through which the game balls launched by right-handed hitting flow down. First path 302 (first route, in-route) that guides the game ball to the entry area 3C provided with various entrances such as 26, and outside the game area (outside the machine) without guiding to the entry area 3C. Two routes are provided with a second route 303 (second route, out route) for guiding the game ball, and the branch portion 301 above the gate 28 is supposed to branch to these two routes. Due to the existence of these two paths 302 and 303, the rate (passage rate) of the right-handed game ball (launched at the second firing intensity) flowing down (passing) through the first path 302 or the second path 303 is designed. Depending on the value, the amount of game balls guided to the entry area (inside the right game area 3B) or outside the game area can be adjusted, and the inflow rate (passage) of the game balls to the gate 28 side (entry area 3C). The rate) can be adjusted as appropriate. As described above, the adjustment can be performed by adjusting the angle of the game nail provided in the vicinity of the second out port 34b.

In the first embodiment, the first path 302 passes through the front surface side of the game board 2, and the second path 303 passes through the back surface side of the game board 2. Then, in the first path 302, one game ball passage that allows the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 to flow down (pass) and extends from the position of the gate 28 to the side (vertical direction) of the entry area 3C. 302a (first ball passage) is provided. Therefore, among the right-handed game balls, the game balls distributed to the first path 302 can quickly flow down toward the entry area 3C, and the right-handed game can proceed smoothly without stress. Is possible.

Further, the first game ball passage 302a of the present embodiment has a shape that is bent in the middle, whereby the flow speed of the game ball is appropriately reduced. That is, the first game ball passage 302a is provided with a function (deceleration means) for reducing the flow speed of the game ball. This is because the game ball launched by right-handed (second firing intensity) is launched more vigorously than left-handed and enters the right game area 3B. The first game ball passage 302a does not have to be bent in the middle, and may be, for example, a straight shape that is straight up and down.

On the other hand, in the second path 303, a game ball that has flowed into the second out port 34b can flow down (pass) and extends from the position of the second out port 34b to the lower end side (vertical direction) of the game board 2. The second game ball passage 303a (second ball passage) is provided. In FIG. 53, the second game ball passage 303a located on the back surface side of the game board 2 is shown by a broken line. The second game ball passage 303a of the present embodiment has a straight shape in which substantially the entire body is straight up and down except for the vicinity of the second out port 34b. Therefore, the right-handed game ball passing through the second path 303 quickly flows down and is discharged to the outside of the machine. This is because the flow speed of the game ball is not slowed down in the middle of the second game ball passage 303a. The second game ball passage 303a does not have to have a straight shape, and may have a shape bent in the middle, for example, the first game ball passage 302a.

Here, the first game ball passage 302a provided on the front surface side (first path 302) of the game board 2 and the second game ball passage 303a provided on the back surface side (second path 303) of the game board 2. Are arranged on one side end side (right end side) of the game board 2 side by side when the game board 2 is viewed from the front. By doing so, the installation space of the game ball passage is not hindered by the work such as assembling and wiring of the gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) of the gate 28 (start gate 29) provided in the first path 302. It is possible to suppress the game area 3 as much as possible so that the game area 3 is not narrowed. If workability such as assembly and wiring of the gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) does not matter, the first game ball passage 302a on the front side of the game board (first path 302) and the back side of the game board. The second game ball passage 303a of (second path 303) may be provided as a positional relationship in which a part or all of them overlaps the front and back (front and back). In this case, since the two game ball passages overlap each other in the front-rear direction (front and back), it is possible to expand the game area 3 as compared with the case where the two game ball passages are lined up side by side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, both the first path 302 and the second path 303 pass through the surface side of the game board 2, and the first path 302 and the second path 303 are on the surface side of the game board 2. It may be arranged side by side with. In this case, the first game ball passage 302a of the first path 302 and the second game ball passage 303a of the second path 303 are arranged side by side and aggregated on one side end side (right end side) of the game board 2. Provide. This also makes it possible to minimize the installation space of the game ball passage so that the game area is not narrowed. When the first game ball passage 302a and the second game ball passage 303a are provided on the surface side of the game board 2 in this way, the second game ball passage 303a is located on the passage start end side (entrance of the second path 303). An opening for guiding the game ball flowing down the second game ball passage 303a to the back surface side of the game board 2 and discharging it to the outside of the machine at the end of the passage of the second game ball passage 303a without providing the out port 34b. A 303b (exhaust port) can be provided. In this case, since it is not necessary to provide the game parts (so-called pocket-type entry port components) constituting the second out port 34b, the number of parts of the board parts can be reduced. In addition, since the game ball passing through (flowing down) through the second game ball passage 303a (second path 303, out route) can be visually recognized, whether or not any adjustment (unjust adjustment) that is disadvantageous to the player has been made. It becomes easy to confirm (check). This makes it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

In the first embodiment, in the right game area 3B, on the downstream side (passage exit side) of the first game ball passage 302a, the game ball that has flowed down (passed) through the first game ball passage 302a is inserted into the ball entry area. A game ball passage (passage in the entry area) to flow down in 3C is formed. This game ball passage is formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 that opens and closes the first prize opening 30, and is a single (one-stage) game ball passage 305 that allows the game ball to flow down to the right (toward the right end of the board). It is composed of an upper game ball passage 306 and a lower game ball passage 307, which are branched into upper and lower stages on the downstream side and allow the game balls to flow down to the left (toward the center of the board), respectively. The upper game ball passage 306 is provided with a third starting port 26, and the lower game ball passage 307 is provided with a second starting port 31 and a second winning opening 35. As shown in FIG. 53, in the ball entry area 3C, the game ball passage 305 is located at the uppermost stage among the game ball passage 305, the upper stage side game ball passage 306, and the lower stage side game ball passage 307, and the lower stage side game. The ball passage 307 is located at the bottom, and the upper game ball passage 306 is located in the middle between the game ball passage 305 and the lower game ball passage 307. Therefore, in the following description, the game ball passage 305 is referred to as "upper passage 305", the upper game ball passage 306 is referred to as "middle passage 306", and the lower game ball passage 307 is referred to as "lower". It is called "passage 307".

As shown in FIG. 53, the middle passage 306 and the lower passage 307 are formed as staggered passages (stepped passages), respectively. That is, the middle passage 306 is composed of an upper passage 306a forming the upper (upstream) side and a lower passage 306b forming the lower (downstream) side of the passage. Similarly, the lower passage 307 also includes an upper passage 307a and a lower passage 307b. A third starting port 26 is provided at the step portion 306b between the upper passage 306a and the lower passage 306b in the middle passage 306, and between the upper passage 307a and the lower passage 307b in the lower passage 307. A third out port 34c is provided at the stepped portion 307d of the above. By providing the third starting port 26 and the third out port 34c in the stepped portions 306d and 307d in this way, the stepped portion (stepped portion) of the stepped passage can be started and entered (safe ball processing) and ball discharged (out ball processing). ), And as a result, it is possible to save space in the ball entry area 3c. To save space in the ball entry area 3c, the display screen 7a (effect display area) on which various effect displays are performed and the center decoration 10 surrounding the display screen 7a (effect display area) are enlarged and the right-handed game (in a relatively advantageous game state). It is effective for facilitating the game).

Next, Example 2 of the present invention will be described. The second embodiment shows one embodiment of the game effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

The various effects described in the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later are described in the sub control unit 90 (for effect control) based on various control commands from the main control unit 80, as described in the first embodiment. It is realized by the control process (received command analysis process (S4302), variation effect start process (S4404), hit game effect process (S4408), etc.) performed by the microcomputer 91). Therefore, the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) is also referred to as an “effect execution means”.

Further, in the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the big hit game is also referred to as a "first special game", and the small hit game is also referred to as a "second special game". .. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the special symbol hit / fail determination acquired by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26 (satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition). The jackpot judgment based on the random number (acquisition information) (see S1604, S1605, S1606 in FIG. 8 (A), S1604, S1605, S1606 in FIG. 23, and S1303, S1309, S1304 in FIG. 32) is also referred to as "first special game judgment". The small hit determination (see S1303, S1309, S1305 in FIGS. 8 (A) and 32) based on the random number (acquisition information) for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is also referred to as "second special game determination", and the large hit determination is made. When the result is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined, that is, the game state after the big hit game (after the first special game) is changed to the state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) or the state C (state C). Judgment as to which of the high-accuracy and low-base states (see FIG. 8B, S1608 in FIG. 23, and S1310 in FIG. 32) is also referred to as "big hit type determination" or "state determination". The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that performs 1 special game determination, 2nd special game determination, and state determination is referred to as "1st special game determination means", "2nd special game determination", and "state determination means". Also called.

Further, in the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later, the high base state (low probability high base state and high probability high base state, that is, state B) in the above-mentioned Example 1 is referred to as "the first gaming state". The low-probability high-base state (state B) is also called the "low-probability and first gaming state", and the high-probability high-base state (state B) is also called the "high-probability and first gaming state". The high-probability low-base state (state C) is also referred to as a "second game state" or a "small hit frequent occurrence state".

[Game production in state A]
The game effect executed in the state A, which is the low probability low base state (normal game state), is mainly based on the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 20. , The effect symbol game effect (variable effect) executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. As described above, in the state A, "A" or "B" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect of the state A is performed under the condition that the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the second embodiment, the setting and transition of the effect mode in the state A are automatically performed according to the predetermined mode control conditions under the control of the sub control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). There is. Therefore, the player cannot be involved in the setting (transition) of the effect mode in the state A. Note that, for example, the player may operate the effect button 63 or the like during the demo effect so that the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode in the state A.

In the state A (effect mode A or B), as the effect symbol 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" consisting of blue symbols and the symbols "1", "3" consisting of green symbols are used. , "5", "9" and "7" consisting of red symbols are displayed. The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying this on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be executed.

Under such an effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 55, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 55 (a)), the variation display is basically the second stop mode. It is stopped at (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (see Fig. 55 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)), and the shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 When the function is activated (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), it is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (directed symbol 8L) and the right symbol (directed symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 55 (f)), and then the middle symbol (directed symbol 8C) is displayed in a variable manner. Until it is stopped, the reach effect is executed on the image display device or the like. In the reach effect, an effect indicating whether or not the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the previously stopped symbol (whether or not the jackpot mode is displayed) is mainly developed. The same applies to the states B and C with respect to the establishment of reach and the effect of reach.

While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in different stitches (completely loose stitches or reach loose stitches) as a result of the variable display, it is "off". On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the jackpot game can be executed, and when the jackpot game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 Is switched to the jackpot game effect (15R jackpot game effect or 4R jackpot game effect) for the jackpot related to the first special symbol. Then, when the big hit game is based on "15R 1st big hit" or "4R 2nd big hit", the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a high probability low base state (state C, 2nd game state), and " In the case of "4R 3rd big hit", the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high probability high base state (state B, high probability and 1st game state), and in the case of "4R 4th big hit", that The game state after the jackpot game ends is the low probability high base state (state B, low probability and first game state) (see FIG. 6).

[Game production of state B]
The game effect executed in the state B which is the low probability high base state (low probability and first game state) or the high probability high base state (high probability and first game state) is mainly the second start port 21. This is an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination triggered by entering the ball. As described above, in the state B, "E" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect in the state B is performed in a situation where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, in the effect mode E, a fluctuation count image (not shown) showing the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of the high base state is displayed on a predetermined portion (for example, the upper part of the screen) of the display screen 7a. The remaining number of fluctuations shown by the fluctuation count image is displayed by subtracting once each time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed, with the initial value of 100 times, which is the maximum number of continuations in the low accuracy and high base state. .. The initial value of 100 times is set regardless of whether the effect mode E is in the low probability high base state (low probability and first game state) or in the high probability high base state (high probability and first game state). This is because the high base state (first game state) is continued unless a big hit occurs until the fluctuation display is performed at least 100 times. Further, the effect mode E is a game state non-notification mode, and it is determined whether the game state (state B) is a low accuracy high base state or a high accuracy high base state until at least 100 fluctuation displays are performed. This is because it is necessary to make it difficult (impossible) to distinguish through the production.

Then, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times without a big hit in the effect mode E (state B), if the game state (state B) related to the effect mode E is the low accuracy and high base state. The low-accuracy high-base state ends with the 100th variation display, the gaming state shifts to the low-accuracy low-base state, and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B". On the other hand, if the gaming state (state B) related to the effect mode E is the high accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state and the effect mode E are continued even after the 101st time. When the effect mode E continues after the 101st time in this way, the display mode of the fluctuation count image remains in a special mode indicating the number of fluctuations "infinity" (for example, an image consisting of the characters "infinity" and the symbol "∞"). Is displayed.

In this embodiment, the setting of the effect mode E is automatically performed with the transition to the state B under the control of the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). Further, since the state B is a game state in which the right-handed game is basically performed, in the effect mode E, the right-handed instruction image M for instructing the right-handed is displayed on a predetermined portion of the display screen 7a (for example, the upper right of the screen). It is displayed (see FIG. 57).

In the state B (effect mode E), as the effect symbol 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" consisting of blue symbols and the symbols "1" and "9" consisting of green symbols are used. Then, the symbols "3", "5", and "7" consisting of the red symbols are displayed. The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying this on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be executed. In this embodiment, the mode (design) of the effect symbol 8 is different between the state A and the state B. The mode (design) of the effect symbol 8 may be the same in the state A and the state B.

Under such an effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 56, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 56 (a)), the variation display is basically a third stop mode. It is stopped at (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 56 (b)). This is because in the state B, the first special symbol time saving function and the high base generation function are activated, so that the deviation variation without reach and the small hit variation can be digested in the shortest possible time so that the game can proceed smoothly. Because. When the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game) immediately after the stop, so that the player's expectation can be expected. Don't be afraid of people. On the other hand, when there is an out-of-reach fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation (that is, "reach fluctuation"), or when the reach fluctuation is disguised as a normal fluctuation, the "reach out-of-reach fluctuation" (a type of fluctuation mode without reach) is performed. If so, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIGS. 56 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → ( f) See).

While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged mode (separate stitch) as a result of the variable display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the jackpot game can be executed, and when the jackpot game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut into the jackpot game effect. Instead, round production is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. The types of jackpots that can occur in state B are, in principle, the same as in state A. This is because the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed. Then, the game state after the big hit game ends is a high probability low base state (state C, second game state) when the big hit game is based on "15R first big hit" or "4R second big hit", and "4R". In the case of "3rd big hit", it becomes a high probability high base state (state B, high probability and 1st game state), and in the case of "4R 4th big hit", it becomes a low probability high base state (state B, low probability and 1st game state). 1 game state) (see FIG. 6).

In addition, in the low accuracy high base state of the state B, when the variation display of the special symbol (mainly the first special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) without a big hit, the predetermined number of times. The game state shifts to the state A (low accuracy low base state) by executing the eye variation display (disengagement variation), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B" after the end of the variation display. ..

[Game production in state C]
The game effect executed in the state C, which is the high-accuracy low-base state (second game state), is mainly based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination triggered by the entry of the ball into the third starting port 26. Therefore, there are an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, and an effect associated with the occurrence of a small hit (small hit game effect). The state C is an advantageous gaming state (specific gaming state) in which a large number of prize balls can be expected to be obtained by the small hits between the big hits by causing the small hits to occur frequently until the next big hit occurs. For this reason, in the state C, it is decided to perform a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked.

Further, in the state C, as described above, "C" or "D" is set as the effect mode. Here, in the second embodiment, the effect modes C and D in the state C are set as internal modes for the effect control, and various effect images (effects) displayed on the display screen 7a in the effect mode C and the effect mode D. The basic production modes such as (designs, background images, etc.) and various production sounds (voice, music, sound effects, etc.) output as the production progresses are the same. Therefore, the player recognizes that there is only one type of effect mode corresponding to the state C on the surface (apparently). On the other hand, the execution of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect related to the 15R jackpot fluctuation) performed when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "big hit" and the type of the jackpot is "15R fifth jackpot". The mode is different between the effect mode C and the effect mode D. Therefore, the effect mode D functions as a trigger for executing (generating) the variation effect related to the 15R jackpot variation in a mode different from the normal (effect mode C).

In this embodiment, when the jackpot game related to the jackpot (15R first jackpot, 4R second jackpot, 15R fifth jackpot) that triggers the transition to state C is completed, the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) determines. Under control, the effect mode C (mode status "3") is set by default with the transition to the state C. Then, while the game in the state C progresses, when a predetermined mode transition condition is satisfied, the production mode D is set instead of the production mode C (shift to the production mode D), and then a big hit occurs in the production mode D. If the variation display of the second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) without doing so, the effect mode C is set again (returns to the effect mode C).

The mode transition condition is, for example, that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without a big hit in the effect mode C, or that the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) determines the mode transition condition. By winning the mode transition lottery executed under control and pre-judgment related to the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2 hold look-ahead), the specific hold (for example, 15R 5th jackpot hold) is stored in the 2nd special figure hold. It can be determined that the player wins the mode transition lottery, and the like. Further, the effect mode C and the effect mode D may be periodically switched based on the passage of a predetermined time by using an internal timer.

As described above, although "C" or "D" is internally set as the effect mode in the state C, the effect mode is basically the same (one type) on the surface (apparently). Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the basic effect mode corresponding to the state C is “C”.

In the effect mode C (state C), as shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), the effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8. , A background image, a character, or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode is displayed. The effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect mode C is composed of the blue symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" and the green symbol, as in the state B (effect mode E). It consists of "1" and "9" symbols and "3", "5" and "7" symbols consisting of red symbols. Further, in this embodiment, the mode (design) of the effect symbol 8 is the same in the state B and the state C. The aspect (design) of the effect symbol 8 related to the state C may be the same as that of the state A, different from the state B, different from both the state A and the state B, and the like. It is possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57A, a right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handedness is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the number of winning prize balls (acquired) is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The prize ball count image C showing the profit amount) is displayed. The right-handed instruction image M is the same as the state B (effect mode E). The prize ball count image C is composed of an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a 5-digit number of "00000" to "99999" and a character image of "pt" (point). This prize ball count image C mainly displays the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls won) acquired by the player in the big hit game, the small hit game, etc. as the number of points, and the game state after the big hit game is displayed. In the case of the state C, the number of prize balls won during that period (so-called consecutive villas) until the game state becomes the state A (excluding during the big hit game) or the state B, that is, until the state C ends. The number of prize balls won during the period) is displayed. Further, since the state C (high accuracy and low base state) is an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently (the execution frequency of the small hit game increases), the prize ball acquisition (increase in the number of balls held) in the small hit game is obtained. The prize ball count image C is displayed for directing. That is, as the small hit game effect, the effect display (ball entry effect) by the prize ball count image C is performed.

The basic flow of the variable display (effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode C of such a screen configuration will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 57. In FIG. 57, for convenience of explanation, some display contents such as production hold (holding symbol) and background are omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 57 (a)), the variation display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 57). 57 (b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time saving function is activated, so that the out-of-reach variation without reach can be digested in as short a time as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination is "off" and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation, the variation display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop). When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. .. Therefore, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, the effect (fanning effect) for increasing the player's expectation is not performed.

On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit" and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by reach fluctuation (missing or jackpot) or reach fanning deviation fluctuation, the effect symbol 8 The variation display of is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (see FIG. 57 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being "small hit", the variation display is performed in the normal variation, and then the first stop mode (left). It is stopped at the symbol → middle symbol → right symbol), and as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific random pattern (small hit mode) (see FIG. 57 (g) → (h) → (i)). ).

Here, in the present embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, and of the three symbols, two adjacent symbols are the same, and the remaining one is a different symbol combination (“335”, “355””. , "557", etc.) is set as a specific variation (small hit mode). Although the symbol combination that constitutes a specific pattern does not establish reach, it constitutes a combination in which two adjacent symbols have the same symbol (number), so such a symbol combination is called "reach arrangement". Also called.

Of the symbols ("3", "5", "7") that make up a specific loose eye (small hit mode), the symbols "3" and "5" form a specific loose eye in state A. Although it is a green symbol (first symbol type) that cannot be obtained, in the state C, it is a red symbol (second symbol type) that can form a specific disparity. That is, the symbols "3" and "5" are symbols whose symbol types change depending on the game state. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pattern type (color type in this example) of the effect pattern and to attract the interest in the game. In particular, when small hits occur frequently, the stop display of a specific ballet (small hit mode) is frequently executed, and the stop display may be displayed multiple times in succession, so that the player's attention is further increased. It will be possible to collect.

In addition, in this embodiment, a part of the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”) which are considered to be green symbols in the state A, and a specific disparity (first) in the state C. The red symbol that can form the display mode) is used. For example, a part of the effect symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that are the blue symbols in the state A is used as the red symbol. Or, in state A, there are blue symbols ("2", "4", "6", "8") and green symbols ("1", "3", "5"). , "9"), respectively (for example, "4" and "5") can be made into a red pattern. Further, as the symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C, which does not exist (appear) in the state A, may be provided, and a specific variation (small hit mode) may be formed by the symbols belonging to the dedicated symbol type. For example, a gold symbol (gold symbol) can be provided as a symbol type dedicated to the state C, and a part of the effect symbol that is a green symbol in the state A can be a gold symbol in the state C. As a result, it is possible to make the symbol types that can form a specific pattern more prominent and to easily attract the attention of the player.

Alternatively, in this embodiment, the symbols "3" and "5", which are green symbols (first symbol type) in state A, are designated as red symbols (second symbol type) in state C. In this case, , The symbol of "7", which was a red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning in the state A, may be configured to be a gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the symbols "3" and "5", which are red symbols (second symbol type), are used as symbols that can form a specific doublet, and the symbols "7", which are gold symbols (third symbol type), are used. Can be a 15R jackpot mode (doublet of "7", specific display mode) corresponding to the 15R fifth jackpot. As a result, the symbol type (red symbol) that constitutes a specific doublet (small hit mode) and the symbol type (gold symbol) that constitutes a specific doublet (15R jackpot mode) are clearly distinguished, and the hit type. It is possible to show the correspondence between and the symbol type in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, any one of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8L (for example, the middle symbol 8C) is provided with a symbol dedicated to the small hit (for example, the "small hit medium symbol") that is stopped and displayed when the small hit is won. When the hit-only symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol dedicated to the small hit is used regardless of the type of the remaining symbols, that is, regardless of the stop result (stop display mode) composed of the three symbols. The occurrence of a small hit (small hit winning) may be notified. This also makes it easier to understand the occurrence of small hits and makes it easier to attract the attention of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the derivation display (stop of the variable display) of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) in the effect mode C, the first stop mode (left symbol →) that cannot appear in other effect modes. The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the order of stopping the middle symbol → the right symbol). For this reason, the player is attracted not only to the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) but also to the stop mode of the variable display that triggers the display of the small hit mode. Further, in the effect mode C, the effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbols) is performed when the derivation display of the small hit mode (stop display of the effect symbol 8) is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (i), an effect image E (effect image) configured as an image (decorative image) that decorates the periphery of each of the left, middle, and right symbols is displayed. .. As a result, the display of the small hit mode (the execution of the small hit game) can be emphasized when the variable display according to the first stop mode is stopped, and when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the effect of the production. The aspect of the effect image E is not limited to this embodiment, and various other aspects can be adopted.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in a small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode as an opportunity, the winning prize ball shown by the prize ball count image C is obtained for each entry. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In this embodiment, the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, and therefore, the winning prize shown by the prize ball count image C. The number of balls is added in units of 10. The effect of adding and displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) shown by the prize ball count image C is also referred to as "acquired profit effect". Further, when the small hit game is executed triggered by the display of the small hit mode, the effect display (character) by the character (not shown) displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a is accompanied by the execution of the small hit game. (Direction) is to be performed. Specifically, it is intended to perform an effect (character effect display + dialogue voice output) in which the character emits a predetermined line, or an effect (character motion display) in which the character shows a predetermined movement.

The addition display of the prize ball count image C accompanying the small hit sub-controls the second prize ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second prize opening sensor 35a. The character effect display accompanying the small hit is performed based on the reception by the unit 90, and the character effect display accompanying the small hit is based on the reception of the small hit opening command (S2066) transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub control unit 90. Therefore, all of these effects correspond to small hit game effects (S4407, S4408).

In the production mode C (state C), the winning probability of the small hit (small hit probability) in the second special symbol winning / failing judgment is very high (“420/630” = “1 / 1.5”), and the small hit game is played. Since there is a high possibility that it will be executed a plurality of times in succession, the stop in the first stop mode of the effect symbol 8 and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) occur frequently, and the small hit mode is accompanied by this. The addition display of the prize ball count image C and the character effect display in the winning game can also be executed with high frequency. For this reason, it is possible to strongly impress the player with the occurrence of small hits by coordinating such a production symbol game production (variable production) with the small hit game production. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation for winning a prize ball (increasing the number of balls held) due to frequent small hits, and to enhance the game interest in the production mode C (state C). It should be noted that the character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the sub-control unit 90 receiving the second large winning opening ball entry command from the main control unit 80, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C. It may be configured as follows. In this case, since the character production is not performed unless the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game, the relevant entry when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 is performed. It is possible to make a strong impression on the player, and it is easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game.

Next, the effect symbol game effect when the big hit variation (special figure 2 big hit variation) is performed in the state C (high accuracy low base state, second game state) will be described. Here, when the result of the second special hit / fail determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is one of "15R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", and "2R 7th big hit" (FIG. 6, FIG. (See FIG. 8). In view of this, in the following, in the state C, (1) the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "big hit", and the result of the big hit type judgment of the second special symbol is "15R fifth big hit" (hereinafter, simply "" (Also referred to as "15R jackpot")) (see FIGS. 8 (A) and 8 (B)) and (2) the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment becomes a "big hit" and the second special symbol When the result of the jackpot type determination is "2R 6th jackpot" or "2R 7th jackpot" (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "2R jackpot") (see FIGS. 8A and 8B). The contents will be explained.

[Production content in the case of a 15R jackpot]
As described above, in the state C (high accuracy low base state, second game state), there are two types of production modes, the production mode C and the production mode D, as the internal production mode, and the production mode C is the basic. Then, the effect symbol game effect progresses, and the effect mode D may be temporarily set when the mode transition condition is satisfied. When the 15R jackpot fluctuation is performed in the effect mode C under such effect mode control, the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is shown on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 58 (a). Is expanded.

That is, when the 15R jackpot variation of the second special symbol (special diagram 2 jackpot variation) is performed in the effect mode C, on the display screen 7a, from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 to the establishment of reach, FIG. 57 (a) → (c) → The effect display is performed according to the flow shown in (d). Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (a-1), when the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R stop (temporarily stop) at the same symbol (number) and reach is established, then on the display screen 7a, FIG. 58 is displayed. As shown in (a-2), a predetermined reach effect (SP reach effect, development effect, etc.) is performed. This reach effect is based on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above. At this time, the display content of the display screen 7a is such that the effect symbol 8, the background image (character) behind it, and the prize ball count image C, which have been displayed from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 to the establishment of the reach, are hidden and reach. Mainly the production image related to the production. As a result, it is possible to improve the visibility of the reach effect performed on the display screen 7a and enhance the effect.

In this embodiment, the right-handed instruction image M remains displayed even while the reach effect is being performed. This is because the state C is a game state in which the right-handed game is performed, and even after the jackpot game is started after the reach effect, the right-handed game is continuously performed. However, during the reach effect, the right-handed instruction image M may be hidden, or the brightness (brightness) of the right-handed instruction image M may be darker than usual while the right-handed instruction image M is displayed. The display mode of the right-handed instruction image M may be less conspicuous than usual (more than the reach effect), such as making the transparency higher than usual to make it translucent. By making the display mode of the right-handed instruction image M different from the normal one in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the launch of the game ball may be stopped during the reach effect.

Then, after the display (notification) indicating the jackpot confirmation is performed in the reach effect, the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the jackpot mode (specific display mode) on the display screen 7a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (a-3), three symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (directed symbols 8), left, middle, and right, are located in the substantially center (predetermined display portion) of the display screen 7a. Is displayed in doublet (specific display mode), which is a big hit mode (design display effect). After that, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 by hitting right, the 15R jackpot game (first special game, second round number special game) is started (executed). In this 15R jackpot game, a round number image indicating the number of remaining rounds and a predetermined round effect image (video or still image) are displayed on the display screen 7a, and a predetermined effect sound (musical piece or the like) is output from the speaker 67. 15R jackpot game production is executed. Further, after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the state C (effect mode C) is set again.

On the other hand, when the 15R jackpot variation of the second special symbol (special diagram 2 jackpot variation) is performed in the effect mode D, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 58 (b). After the start of, the effect symbol 8, the background image (character), and the prize ball count image C are hidden, and the effect image (also referred to as "big hit transition effect image") showing the transition from the small hit frequent occurrence state to the 15R big hit game. ) Is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this embodiment, three images G1 to G3 (predetermined effect images) are provided as the jackpot transition effect images. Specifically, an image G1 consisting of the characters "Ikuzo", an image G2 consisting of a star figure with the characters "GET" written in the center, and an image G3 consisting of the characters "READY GO!" It has. The jackpot transition effect image (predetermined effect image) is displayed in the order of image G1, image G2, and image G3 (see FIGS. 58 (b-2) to (b-4)). The 15R jackpot variation effect executed in such effect mode D is also based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 described above. While the jackpot transition effect image is displayed, the right-handed instruction image M remains displayed as in the case where the reach effect described above is being performed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 by right-handed while the image G3 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the 15R jackpot game (first special game, second round number special game) starts (executes). Will be done. In this 15R big hit game, instead of the above-mentioned 15R big hit game production, the background image (character) and the prize ball count image C that were hidden before the start of the 15R big hit game are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the small hit. The same effect as during the game, that is, the above-mentioned earned profit effect and character effect is executed as the jackpot game effect. Specifically, every time a game ball enters the first large winning opening 30, the number of winning prize balls (numerical image) indicated by the prize ball count image C is added and displayed (updated), and the character is predetermined. A character effect display that emits a line or shows a predetermined movement is executed. In this way, even during the 15R jackpot game, the background image (character) and the prize ball count image C in the previous state C are displayed, and the effect (second display effect) is performed by these effect images (second effect image). Therefore, the earned profit effect and the character effect (second display effect) in the state C are continuously executed over the 15R jackpot game. Further, after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the state C (effect mode C) is set again, and the background image (character) and the prize ball count image C corresponding to the effect mode C are displayed on the display screen 7a even in the state C. , Earned profit effect and character effect are executed. As a result, a sense of unity between the state C (small hit frequent occurrence state) in which the small hit game (second special game) is executed frequently and the 15R big hit game (first special game) is fostered, and the interest of state C is enjoyed. Can be improved.

As described above, in the state C, when the 15R jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation) is performed, the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) related to the variation is three effect symbols 8L, 8C, Based on the pattern (symbol display effect) in which 8R is stopped and displayed in doublet (specific display mode), there may be a pattern in which the effect pattern 8 (doublet) is not displayed and the jackpot transition effect image is displayed. It has become. Therefore, at the start of the 15R jackpot game in the state C, the three symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (effect symbol 8) on the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed in doublet (specific display mode) after the reach effect. A standard mode in which the jackpot game is started, and a non-standard mode in which the jackpot transition image is displayed and the jackpot game is started without executing the stop display by doublet of the effect symbol 8. And will exist. As a result, the mode when the 15R jackpot game (first special game, second round number special game) is started in the state C is not uniform, and it is possible to give unexpectedness to the mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of state C.

[Production content in the case of 2R jackpot]
When the 2R jackpot fluctuation is performed in the state C (high accuracy low base state, second game state), the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is developed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 59. In the state C, there are an effect mode C and an effect mode D as an internal effect mode, and the effect symbol game effect proceeds based on the effect mode C, but the variation effect related to the 2R jackpot fluctuation is the effect mode. It is executed in the same (common) manner in C and D. In addition, there are two types of 2R jackpots, "2R 6th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot", but in the case of "2R 6th jackpot" (the game state after the 2R jackpot game becomes a highly accurate and high base state). The same (common) variation effect is executed in the case of "2R 7th big hit" (when the game state after the 2R big hit game becomes the low accuracy high base state).

When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a with the start of the 2R jackpot fluctuation (special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation), the sliding door images F1 and F2 are displayed on the display screen 7a at substantially the same timing as the start. It is displayed toward the center from (see FIGS. 59 (1) and 59 (2)). The fusuma images F1 and F2 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the variable effect image including the effect symbol 8, the background image (character), and the prize ball count image C during the variable display, and are displayed behind the right-handed instruction image M. Displayed on the side. That is, it is displayed between the variable effect image and the right-handed instruction image M. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of hiding the variable effect image while indicating that the game is in a game state in which the right-handed game is performed.

On the display screen 7a, due to the appearance of the sliding door images F1 and F2, the sliding doors are closed and the variable effect image is hidden (see FIG. 59 (3)). After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (4), whether or not the sliding door image F1 on the left side and the sliding door image F2 on the right side are completely opened by repeating the reciprocating movement (opening / closing operation) in the left-right direction. The effect display shown is performed on the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (5), the fusuma images F1 and F2 completely conceal the variation effect image and finish the opening / closing operation, so that the variation effect related to the 2R jackpot variation (also referred to as “2R jackpot variation effect”). Say) ends. The 2R jackpot variation effect including the display of the fusuma images F1 and F2 is based on the variation effect pattern set in the above-mentioned S4505.

Further, at the end of the 2R big hit fluctuation effect, a notification to the effect that the state C (small hit frequent occurrence state) has been reached (also referred to as “state C end notification”) can be performed on the display screen 7a (FIG. 59 (5). )), The player can recognize that the 2R jackpot fluctuation has ended and that the state C has ended through the state C end notification. As for the mode of the state C end notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (5), the character image of "○○ mode end ..." (○○ mode means state C) is used as the fusuma images F1 and F2. It is possible to display it on the front side of the above, but it is also possible to use other modes as a matter of course, and if it is possible to make the player recognize that the state C is finished, that is the case. The mode does not matter.

Here, the fusuma images F1 and F2 are images suggesting the transition from the state C to the state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state), that is, the end of the state C (also referred to as "suggested image"). The effect performed by displaying the fusuma images F1 and F2 is an effect (also referred to as "suggestion display effect") that suggests that the state C may be terminated.

After the suggestion display effect (2R jackpot variation effect) is completed with the fusuma images F1 and F2 hiding the entire variation effect image, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 by right-handed, the 2R jackpot game (1st special) The game, the first round number special game) is started (executed). In this 2R jackpot game, an effect display (not shown) indicating the transition to the effect mode E (state B) is executed as the 2R jackpot game effect. The 2R jackpot game production is the case of the 2R 6th jackpot (when shifting to the high accuracy high base state after the 2R jackpot game) and the case of the 2R 7th jackpot (when shifting to the low accuracy high base state after the 2R jackpot game). And it is executed in the same (common) manner.

Then, when the 2R jackpot game is completed and the game state becomes the state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state), the effect mode E is set. As described above, the effect mode E is an effect mode set in both the low accuracy and high base state and the high accuracy and high base state, and is a game state non-notification mode. Therefore, in the effect mode E, the effect symbol 8, the background image, the variation count image, etc., which are common with low probability and high probability, regardless of whether the game state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state, etc. An effect display (first display effect) using (first effect image) is executed on the display screen 7a.

In this way, from the start of the 2R jackpot variation effect to the state B after the 2R jackpot game, regardless of whether the state B is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state, the effect of the same aspect (suggestion display effect). , 2R jackpot game production, production mode E) is executed. Therefore, even if the suggestion display effect is executed and the state C (small hit frequent occurrence state) ends, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the subsequent game state is a high probability state. As a result, even if the gaming state shifts from the state C (high accuracy low base state) to the more disadvantageous state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) than the state C, the interest of the state B is improved. It becomes possible to make it.

As the variation effect related to the deviation variation in the state C (disengagement variation effect), the effect of displaying the fusuma images F1 and F2 (suggestion display effect) may be executed in the same manner as the 2R jackpot variation effect. .. In this case, the sliding door images F1 and F2 are displayed in such a manner that the sliding doors are finally fully opened without closing the sliding doors, and the entire variation effect image is returned to the state displayed on the display screen 7a, and the disengagement variation effect ends. .. As a result, even if the suggestion display effect is started, the state C does not always end, so that it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement when the suggestion display effect is started.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the game effect executed in the state C is characteristic. In particular, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit in the state C, the result of the big hit type judgment is the 15R fifth big hit, and the state C is set after the big hit game, basically, the effect is produced. The symbol display effect in which the three symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (plural symbols) constituting the symbol 8 are displayed in doublet (specific display mode) is executed before the start of the 15R jackpot game, and sometimes the 15R jackpot game. The 15R jackpot game may be started without executing the symbol display effect (displaying the jackpot transition effect image) before the start.

On the other hand, in the state C, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit, and the result of the big hit type judgment becomes a 2R 6th big hit or a 2R 7th big hit, and the state B (low accuracy high base state or high) after the big hit game. When the accuracy base state) is set (that is, when the state C ends), the above-mentioned symbol display effect and jackpot transition effect image display are not executed, and instead, the effect symbol 8 and the background are displayed. A suggestion display effect suggesting the end of the state C is executed before the start of the 2R jackpot game by covering the variable effect image including the image with the fusuma images F1 and F2 (suggestion images).

Therefore, in the state C, depending on the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) performed before the start of the big hit game, whether the game state after the big hit game becomes the state C again or the state B (state C continues). It is possible to clearly distinguish (discriminate) whether to end or not. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the state C by making the playability of the state C easy for the player to understand.

Further, in the state C, when the symbol display effect (doublet display) or the display of the jackpot transition effect image is executed as the effect symbol game effect (variable effect), the game in the state C is continuously confirmed as "15R jackpot". If the suggestion display effect is executed without displaying the symbol display effect or the jackpot transition effect image, the "2R jackpot" is determined to end the game in the state C. Therefore, the "design display effect" and the "display of the jackpot transition effect image" in the state C mean the transition to the state C (continuation of the state C) and the execution of the 15R jackpot game (second round number special game). The suggestion display effect in the state C means the transition to the state B (end of the state C) and the execution of the 2R jackpot game (first round number special game). As a result, it is possible to enhance the superiority of the symbol display effect (and the display of the jackpot transition effect image) over the suggestion display effect, and to improve the interest in the state C.

In the second embodiment, the main types of big hits that can occur in the state C, that is, the big hit types when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit (the big hit type of the second special symbol). There were three types, "15R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" (see FIGS. 6 and 8 (B)), but the jackpot type of the 2nd special symbol is limited to this. It's not something. For example, a 15R jackpot A that sets the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high-accuracy low base state (state C), a 15R jackpot B that sets the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high-accuracy high-base state (state B), and a jackpot game. Three types of 15R jackpot C, which sets the subsequent gaming state to the low accuracy and high base state (state B), may be provided as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, and the number of rounds may be the same (one type). Further, in addition to the two types of rounds of 2R and 15R as in the second embodiment, it is also possible to have three or more types such as 2R big hit, 7R big hit and 15R big hit, and the first special It is also possible to make the jackpot type of the symbol and the jackpot type of the second special symbol the same. Further, it is arbitrary how many rounds each of the big hits in which the game state after the big hit game is in the high accuracy low base state, the big hits in the high accuracy high base state, and the big hits in the low accuracy high base state are set.

Further, in the second embodiment, the effect mode C or D is set internally in the state C, and the effect mode corresponding to the state C is superficially set as one type. Then, as the jackpot variation effect (15R jackpot variation effect) related to the 15R 5th jackpot that triggers the setting of the state C, two types of "design display effect" and "display of the jackpot transition effect image" are provided, and an internal effect mode is provided. When is "C", "design display effect" is executed, and when "D", "display of big hit transition effect image" is executed. On the other hand, the effect mode corresponding to the state C is set to one type internally, and the big hit (big hit type) of the second special symbol that triggers the setting of the state C is, for example, "15R big hit A" and "15R big hit B". As the two types, it may be configured to determine which of "design display effect" and "display of big hit transition effect image" is executed according to the type of these 15R jackpots. For example, in the state C, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit and the big hit type is "15R big hit A", the "design display effect" is set as the big hit variation effect related to the 15R big hit A. When the jackpot type is "15R jackpot B", the "display of the jackpot transition effect image" can be executed as the jackpot variation effect related to the 15R jackpot B. In this way, based on the result of the jackpot type determination (state determination) performed under the control of the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), the execution mode of the 15R jackpot variation effect in the state C is determined. In game control, it is possible to determine the execution mode using the originally existing jackpot type determination (state determination), so it is necessary to determine under the control of the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). It becomes possible to improve the efficiency of control.

Next, Example 3 of the present invention will be described. The third embodiment shows one embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, to which a characteristic configuration is added regarding the setting of the ending period when the big hit game ends. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the third embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be omitted. Further, the third embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine having the configuration according to the second embodiment described above.

As described in the first embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed and all the round games constituting the jackpot game are completed, the jackpot end process (S2116) for ending the jackpot game (special game state) is performed. It is done and the ending period (also called the "end period") begins (S2117). Then, when the ending period elapses (YES in S2119), the big hit game (special game state) ends, and the game state after the big hit game is set (S2121). From this, it can be said that the ending period (end period) is a waiting period from the end of all rounds of the jackpot game to the start of the game state after the jackpot game.

In the jackpot end process (S2116), a process of setting a jackpot ending command is performed. In addition to the command set, a process of setting the ending period to a predetermined timer (also referred to as "ending timer") (end period setting process) ) Is performed. The process of S2117 is a process of starting the time measurement (operation of the ending timer) by the ending timer.

It should be noted that the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) performs a process of ending the big hit game and starting the game state after the big hit game when the ending period elapses after the end of all the round games in the big hit game. ) Is also called "state control means". Further, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that performs the process of setting the ending period in the above-mentioned S2116 is also referred to as “end period setting means”.

The ending command set in S2116 is a command for instructing the sub-control unit 90 to execute the ending effect, and when the sub-control unit 90 receives the command, a predetermined ending effect is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is executed. The execution period (execution time) of the ending effect corresponds to the ending period starting in S2117, that is, the ending period set in S2116, and the ending effect is designed so that it can be executed within this ending period. ing. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, the ending period and the ending effect are determined based on the game state when the special symbol winning / failing determination is determined as a big hit and the big hit type.

Specifically, when the gaming state is state A (low accuracy low base state) or state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state, first gaming state), that is, state C (high accuracy low base state). When it is not in the state (second game state), the first special symbol winning / failing determination is mainly executed. In this state A or state B, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and the result of the judgment of the big hit type is the 4R third, which has a relatively high appearance rate among the big hit types related to the first special symbol. In the case of a big hit or a 4R 4th big hit (when the game state after the big hit game becomes state B), in S2116 executed at the end of the big hit game, the length of the ending period (ending time) is "30000 ms". The first ending period (first end period) set to (30 seconds) is set (set). That is, "30000 ms" is set in the ending timer. Further, in S2116, a first ending command for designating the first ending period (30000 ms) is set. When this first ending command is transmitted to the sub control unit 90, the sub control unit 90 executes the corresponding ending effect (first ending effect) based on the first ending command. The details of the ending effect will be described later.

Further, in the state A or the state B, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit and the result of the judgment of the big hit type is a 15R first big hit or a 4R second big hit (the gaming state after the big hit game is In the S2116 executed at the end of the jackpot game (when the state C is reached), the second ending period (second end period) in which the length of the ending period (ending time) is "3000 ms" (3 seconds) is set. It is set (set). That is, "3000 ms" is set in the ending timer. Further, in S2116, a second ending command for designating the second ending period (3000 ms) is set. When this second ending command is transmitted to the sub control unit 90, the sub control unit 90 executes the corresponding ending effect (second ending effect) based on the second ending command.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is the state C (high accuracy low base state, second gaming state), the second special symbol winning / failing determination is mainly executed. In this state C, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and the result of the judgment of the big hit type is the 15R fifth big hit with a relatively high appearance rate among the big hit types related to the second special symbol. In the case of (when the game state after the big hit game becomes state C), in S2116 executed at the end of the big hit game, the length of the ending period (ending time) is set to "3000 ms" (3 seconds). 3 Ending period (3rd end period) is set (set). That is, "3000 ms" is set in the ending timer. Further, in S2116, a third ending command for designating the third ending period (3000 ms) is set. When this third ending command is transmitted to the sub control unit 90, the sub control unit 90 executes the corresponding ending effect (third ending effect) based on the third ending command.

Further, in the state C, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit and the result of the judgment of the big hit type is the 2R 6th big hit or the 2R 7th big hit (the gaming state after the big hit game is in the state B). In S2116, which is executed at the end of the jackpot game, the fourth ending period (fourth end period) in which the length of the ending period (ending time) is "5000 ms" (5 seconds) is set (set). ). That is, "5000 ms" is set in the ending timer. Further, in S2116, a fourth ending command for designating the fourth ending period (5000 ms) is set. When this fourth ending command is transmitted to the sub control unit 90, the sub control unit 90 executes the corresponding ending effect (fourth ending effect) based on the fourth ending command.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the length of the ending period is different depending on the game state (game state when the big hit occurs) when the special symbol hit / fail judgment is determined as a big hit and the big hit type. ing. That is, in the state A or the state B, when a big hit (4R 3rd big hit or 4R 4th big hit) in which the gaming state after the big hit game becomes the state B occurs and the game state becomes the state B after the big hit game, the first An ending period (30000 ms) is set, and in state A or state B, a big hit (15R first big hit or 4R second big hit) in which the gaming state after the big hit game becomes state C occurs, and after the big hit game, the state C In that case, the second ending period (3000 ms) is set, and in the state C, a big hit (15R 5th big hit) in which the game state after the big hit game becomes the state C occurs, and the state C becomes the state C after the big hit game. In this case, the third ending period (3000 ms) is set, and in the state C, a big hit (2R 6th big hit or 2R 7th big hit) in which the gaming state after the big hit game becomes the state B occurs, and after the big hit game When the state B is reached, a fourth ending period (5000 ms) is set.

Therefore, when the state A or the state B is changed to the state B through the big hit game, after the end of all round games in the big hit game, one breath is left before the state B is entered. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game due to the fact that the state C does not shift and the same state B continues. This is because the first ending period has a sufficient time for maintaining / improving the player's motivation to play and refreshing his / her feelings. In particular, in state A or state B, the jackpot in state B (4R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot) is more than the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is in state C (15R first jackpot or 4R second jackpot). ) Has a higher appearance rate (see FIG. 8 (B)), so it is relatively easy that a jackpot occurs but does not shift to the state C or the same state B continues. Considering the psychology of the player under such a situation, it can be said that it is very effective to leave a certain period before the start of the state B (before the transition) after the big hit game.

Further, when the state A or the state B is changed to the state C through the big hit game, the state C is promptly changed after the end of all round games in the big hit game. In this case, after the end of the big hit game, it is possible to start the game in an advantageous game state (high accuracy and low base state) in which small hits frequently occur at an early stage. This fosters a sense of speed of "a game in which the big winning opening (big winning opening for big hits or big winning opening for small hits) repeatedly opens" that is developed from the big hit game to the state C, and improves the game interest. It is possible to make it.

Further, even when the state C is changed to the state C again after the big hit game, the state C is promptly changed after the end of all round games in the big hit game. Even in this case, after the big hit game is completed, it is possible to start the game in an advantageous game state (high accuracy and low base state) in which small hits occur frequently. As a result, a sense of speed is fostered in the "game in which the big winning opening (big winning opening for big hits or big winning opening for small hits) is repeatedly opened" that is developed from the state C to the big hit game and then to the state C again. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. In particular, in the state C, the appearance rate of the big hit (15R 5th big hit) in the state C is higher than that in the big hit (2R 6th big hit or 2R 7th big hit) in which the gaming state after the big hit game is in the state B. Since it is high (see FIG. 8B), the possibility that the state C will continue (continuation rate) is relatively high. Considering the psychology of the player under such a situation, it can be said that it is very effective to promptly start the state C after the big hit game when the state C is changed to the state C again after the big hit game.

Further, when the state C is changed to the state B through the big hit game, the state B is changed to the state B after a short interval after the end of all round games in the big hit game. As a result, while giving the player the recognition that the game in the state C has been completed, the game smoothly shifts to the game in the state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) in which the player continues to hit right. Is possible. In particular, when the jackpot game changes from the state C to the state B, the jackpot game is a 2R jackpot game, and the number of times the first jackpot 30 is opened (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game) is compared with other jackpot games (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game). The number of rounds) is small and the opening time is short. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot game is relatively short. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the ending period of the big hit game (2R big hit game) when the state C is changed to the state B through the big hit game is changed to the state B from the state A or the state B through the big hit game. The fourth ending period (5000 ms) is shorter than the first ending period (30,000 ms). If the ending period of the 2R jackpot game is set to a long time (for example, 30000 ms) like the 4R 3rd jackpot and the 4R 4th jackpot that trigger the setting of the state B, the balance with the execution period of the 2R jackpot game is balanced. This is to avoid such a concern because there is a possibility that the transition to the state B in which the player continues to hit right will be delayed.

By setting the ending period as described above, it is possible to make a difference in the transition mode of the game state, which makes it possible to give a sharpness to the progress of the game and improve the game interest. The length of each ending period (ending time) is only an example, and the time is not limited to this embodiment. At least, the ending period related to the jackpot that triggers the setting of state B (the trigger to shift to state B) is longer than the ending period related to the jackpot that triggers the setting of state C (the trigger to shift to state C). , Each ending period (time) may be determined. However, the first ending period is preferably 15 seconds to 60 seconds, preferably 20 seconds to 40 seconds. This is to secure the time for suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the state C is not changed or the same state B continues, and the execution time of the first ending effect described later.

Further, the third ending period of each of the above ending periods is the ending period when the state C is changed to the state C again after the big hit game (when the state C continues), but the state C before the big hit game and the big hit In consideration of the continuity with the state C after the game, the length of the third ending period can be set to a time shorter than 3000 ms. For example, after all rounds of the jackpot game are completed, the time may be approximately the same as the time required for the control process (big hit end process) for setting (starting) the game state in which the symbol can be changed, or between the round games in the jackpot game. Considering the interval time, it is also possible to set the time to be substantially the same as or less than the interval time (for example, 1000 ms to 2000 ms). If the third ending period is approximately the same as or less than the interval time, the transition to state C after the end of all rounds in the jackpot game will be performed more smoothly and quickly, so it is small. To further emphasize the sense of unity between the state C and the big hit game in which the hit game is executed frequently, and the sense of speed of the "game in which the big winning opening is repeatedly opened" developed from the big hit game to the state C. Is possible.

Next, the effect (ending effect) executed in each of the ending periods will be described. In the following, among the first to fourth ending periods, the first ending effect executed in the first ending period, which is the longest ending period, and the ending executed in each of the other second to fourth ending periods. The production (second to fourth ending productions) will be described in order from the latter.

[2nd to 4th ending production]
The second ending effect is executed during the second ending period set at the end of the jackpot game when the 15R first jackpot or the 4R second jackpot occurs in the state A or the state B. The second ending period is 3000 ms (3 seconds), and the second ending effect is executed during this 3000 ms. The 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot are jackpots in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is the state C. Therefore, the second ending effect is an effect of notifying the start of the state C (transition to the state C). In the second ending effect mode (effect content), for example, a character image of "Entering XX mode!" (XX mode means state C) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the sound of the character is output. It is supposed to be. The mode of the second ending effect is not limited to this, and any mode may be used as long as the player can recognize that the state C is started.

The third ending effect is executed during the third ending period set at the end of the jackpot game when the 15R fifth jackpot occurs in the state C. The third ending period is 3000 ms (3 seconds), and the third ending effect is executed during this 3000 ms. The 15R fifth jackpot is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the state C again. Therefore, the third ending effect is an effect of notifying the continuation of the state C. The third ending effect mode (effect content) is, for example, to display a character image of "○○ mode continued!" (○○ mode means state C) on the display screen 7a and output the sound of the character. It is supposed to be. The mode of the third ending effect is not limited to this, and any mode may be used as long as the player can recognize that the state C continues.

The fourth ending effect is executed during the fourth ending period set at the end of the jackpot game when the 2R 6th jackpot or the 2R 7th jackpot occurs in the state C. The fourth ending period is 5000 ms (5 seconds), and the fourth ending effect is executed during this 5000 ms. The 2R jackpot that can occur in the state C is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is the state B. Therefore, the fourth ending effect is an effect of notifying that the state C ends and shifts to the state B. In the fourth ending effect mode (effect content), for example, a character image of "△△ mode entry" (△△ mode means state B) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode of the fourth ending effect is not limited to this, and any mode may be used as long as it can make the player recognize that the state C ends and shifts to the state B. Further, as described above, the effect mode E is set in the state B, and the effect mode E is the game state non-notification mode. From this, the fourth ending effect related to the 2R 6th big hit and the 4th ending effect related to the 2R 7th big hit have the same (common) effect mode (effect content). It becomes difficult (impossible) to determine whether the game state (probability state) after the big hit game is the low probability high base state (low probability state) or the high probability high base state (high probability state) through the ending effect. To do so.

[1st ending production]
The first ending effect is executed during the first ending period set at the end of the jackpot game when the 4R third jackpot or the 4R fourth jackpot occurs in the state A or the state B. The first ending period is 30,000 ms (30 seconds), which is significantly longer than the other ending periods (second to fourth ending periods). The first ending effect is executed during the 30,000 ms, and the effect mode (effect content) is significantly different from the above-mentioned second to fourth ending effects.

Specifically, in the first ending effect, the image display device is in the state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) after the ending effect, that is, after the big hit game related to the 4R 3rd big hit or the 4R 4th big hit. A character selection effect that selects a character to be displayed on (at least one of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 72, and the third image display device 72) from a plurality of predetermined characters. Will be executed. In this embodiment, five characters, character A, character B, character C, character D, and character E, are prepared, and the player can press any of these characters A to E by the first effect button 63a and / and the first effect button 63a and /. 2 It is configured so that the effect button 63b can be operated and selected. This character selection effect is an ending effect dedicated to the first ending period, which is not executed in the above-mentioned second to fourth ending periods (second to fourth ending effects). The number (type) of characters to be selected (candidates) in the character selection effect is not limited to this embodiment, and can be increased or decreased as compared with this embodiment. .. Further, the number (type) of characters selected from a plurality of characters does not have to be one, and two or more (plural) characters within a range not exceeding the number of characters to be selected (candidates). It is also possible to be able to select.

When the first ending period is started (S2117), the first ending effect (character selection effect) is started accordingly. At this time, as shown in FIG. 61A, the character selection screen S is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The character selection screen S has a selection display area S1 for displaying five character card images corresponding to each of the characters A to E, and a countdown format for the remaining time during which the character can be selected (the remaining time until the end of character selection). It is configured to include the remaining time display area S2 to be displayed in. The remaining time displayed in the remaining time display area S2 is a time within a range not exceeding the length of the first ending period (30 seconds in this example). In the center of the selection display area S1, one character card image currently selected is displayed larger than the other character card images, and when the second effect button 63b is rotated clockwise, the operation is performed. In conjunction with this, all character card images move in the clockwise direction, and when the second effect button 63b is rotated counterclockwise, all character card images move in the counterclockwise direction in conjunction with this. As a result, the character card image located in the center of the selected display area S1 is switched. In this embodiment, the movement display of the character card image in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction is performed by the second effect button 63b. For example, a game such as an operation lever, a cross key, or an operation dial is used. It may be performed by another input operation means provided so that the person can operate it.

While the character selection screen S is displayed (during the first ending period), the player operates the second effect button 63b while viewing the character card image displayed in the selection display area S1 to obtain a desired character. Select. Then, when the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b is pressed while the character card image corresponding to the desired character is located (displayed) in the center of the selection display area S1, the character card image is located at the center of the selected display area S1 (displayed). The (displayed) character card image is enlarged and displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 61 (b). This completes the character selection. Note that FIG. 61 (b) shows that the character A is selected. One character selected in this way is at least one of the image display devices (first image display device 7, second image display device 72, and third image display device 72) in the state B after the lapse of the first ending period. It is displayed on the display screen of 1), and the effect game effect (variable effect) is executed with the character displayed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the character selection on the character selection screen S also serves as the selection of the execution mode (notice mode, notice pattern) of the notice effect that can be executed in the state B. Specifically, the character and the notice pattern are associated with each other, such as the notice pattern A for the character A and the notice pattern B for the character B, and the character is based on the character card image displayed in the selection display area S1. By selecting, the notice pattern is also selected. Then, the advance notice effect based on the notice pattern corresponding to the selected character can be executed in the state B after the lapse of the first ending period. That is, the character selection effect executed as the first ending effect during the first ending period is also a notice mode selection effect for allowing the player to select one of a plurality of predetermined advance notice modes (notice patterns). is there.

Here, the notice effect that can be executed in the state B is mainly the "change notice" that suggests the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) for the change display (also referred to as "the change") currently being executed. And, there is a "special figure 1 hold look-ahead notice" that suggests the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) for the first special figure hold stored in the first special figure hold storage unit. The execution mode (notice pattern) of the notice effect belonging to these "change notice" or "special figure 1 hold look-ahead notice" can be selected in association with the character that can be selected on the character selection screen S.

As shown in FIG. 62, the notice pattern A corresponding to the character A is a notice effect belonging to the change notice, and is a predetermined time during the symbol change (for example, the first stop symbol is stopped from the start of the change (temporary stop)). It is said that the character A issues a predetermined line suggesting the reliability of the jackpot in the meantime.

Further, the notice pattern B corresponding to the character B is a notice effect belonging to the change notice, and the operation instruction image showing how the character B prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a is being changed. A predetermined image suggesting the jackpot reliability is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the player operating (pressing) the first effect button 63a in response to the display on the display screen 7a at a predetermined time. It is said to be "button notice".

Further, the notice pattern C corresponding to the character C is a notice effect belonging to the change notice, and is a predetermined voice suggesting that the change is a big hit change at a predetermined time during the symbol change (for example, when the reach is established). Is output from the speaker 67 in the voice of the character C as a "big hit notification".

Further, the notice pattern D corresponding to the character D is a notice effect belonging to the special figure 1 hold look-ahead notice, and is a notice target among the first effect hold 9a displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c. A "hold change" that changes the display mode of the first effect hold 9a (for example, the display color, shape, design, type, size, etc. of the effect hold) from the normal display mode to a predetermined notice display mode that suggests jackpot reliability. It is said to be "notice".

Further, the notice pattern E corresponding to the character E is a notice effect belonging to the special figure 1 hold look-ahead notice, and is a predetermined notice image suggesting the jackpot reliability across a plurality of consecutive variation displays (variation effect). It is said to be a "continuous notice" that displays a message or outputs a predetermined notice sound.

When any of these advance notice patterns A to E (characters A to E) is selected, in the state B, the advance notice effect (the change notice) in the above-mentioned S4506 and the effect hold information stored in the above-mentioned S4402 When setting the reserved look-ahead notice based on the above, a notice effect based on the selected notice pattern can be set. In this embodiment, when the notice effect based on the notice pattern corresponding to the character selected on the character selection screen S is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than that when other notice effects are executed. It is designed to be high. That is, the notice pattern corresponding to the character selected on the character selection screen S is relatively unlikely to be set (selected) for deviation fluctuations, and is set (selected) for jackpot fluctuations. It is configured to be relatively likely to occur. Note that the notice pattern and the type and content of the notice effect shown in this embodiment are merely examples, and other notice patterns and notice effects can be provided as appropriate according to the number of characters to be selected. It can be set.

As described above, when the first ending effect having both the character selection function and the notice pattern (notice mode) selection function is executed during the first ending period, the state A or the state B is changed to the state B through the big hit game. It is possible to improve the game entertainment of. In particular, the first ending effect having both the character selection function and the advance notice pattern selection function is executed only before the transition from the state A or the state B to the state B after the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the state C, which is the most advantageous gaming state, is not reached, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

Further, in the state B after the lapse of the first ending period (after the big hit game), the character selected in the first ending effect (character selection effect) before the start of the state B is the image display device (first image display device 7). , At least one of the second image display device 72 and the third image display device 72) is displayed on the display screen (predetermined display unit), and the first ending effect (notice mode selection effect) before the start of the state B is displayed. The notice effect can be executed based on the notice pattern selected in). As a result, the first ending effect (character selection effect, notice mode selection effect) executed before the transition to the state B when the state A or the state B goes through the jackpot game and becomes the state B, and after the transition. It is possible to increase the player's interest in the character display and the advance notice effect in the state B.

Here, in the third embodiment, the effect having both the character selection function and the notice pattern (notice mode) selection function, that is, the character selection effect and the notice mode selection effect is executed as the first ending effect. Either one of the character selection effect and the advance notice mode selection effect may be executed as the first ending effect. Further, for example, the character selection effect is executed in the first half of the first ending period and the notice mode selection effect is executed in the second half, or the notice mode selection effect is executed in the first half and the character selection effect is executed in the second half. The first ending period may be divided into a first period and a second period, and each effect may be executed in each period. Further, the first ending period may be divided into a plurality of periods, and different effects may be executed in each period. Further, as the first ending effect, for example, a mode selection for displaying an effect image such as a dedicated moving image or a still image that can be seen only in the first ending period, or selecting an effect mode that is executed only in the state B. Other effects (directed for the first ending period) different from the character selection effect and the advance notice mode selection effect shown in this embodiment, such as displaying a screen, may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set as the subject of the game in the game state according to the game state (the first symbol described later). The variable display shall be synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and by synchronizing with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state, the first special symbol is synchronized. It has a case and a case synchronized with the second special symbol. In this manner, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variable display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one of the special symbols) set as the subject of the game in the game state is displayed in a large size (subject). (Displayed as), and the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the subject of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Further, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol may be displayed according to the game state and the game situation, and the first effect symbol. One of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (main symbol) may be displayed.

In addition, with respect to the above-mentioned configuration of the gaming machine, a "variable entry port" that can be changed into a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second. It is possible to provide a "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable entrance is enabled to enter the ball when the result of the 1st hit / miss judgment or the 2nd hit / miss judgment is a hit. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. In addition, a game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the game state. It can be provided with a "game state setting means" for setting a state (second game state). Here, it is assumed that 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set to one, but the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set. It may be multiple times or may have different open times. Further, in this embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed at the same time, but the second special figure hold is preferentially digested over the first special figure hold. , The so-called special figure 2 priority control process, the control process of preferentially digesting the first special figure hold over the second special figure hold, and the so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be performed. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control treatment, that is, a control process of so-called entry order (memory order) digestion.

In addition, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball-entry state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and the large winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening that is ready for a ball and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without requiring passage to a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is increased. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port is increased. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating / operating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of jackpot probabilities. Is not limited to this, and for example, three or more kinds of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). May be good. Further, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the game machine is turned on, for example. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure hold storage unit is read out for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball, and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined. Although it was supposed to be (preliminary judgment) ("Starting ball entry processing (S205)". See FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the pre-judgment method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, a main control unit or a sub-control unit stores an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on the start-in ball) to be determined in advance. It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit) may be determined (predetermined). In this case, by storing the result of the pre-determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information (acquired information stored in another storage area) used for the pre-determination. Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the acquired information acquired based on the start-in ball may be pre-determined. That is, the acquired information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be pre-determined separately from the special figure holding storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquired information stored in the special figure holding storage unit for the pre-determination. Absent.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided as a main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) Was provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame-side display means) as sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices), but sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices) may be provided on the side of the game board 2. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the panel side display means as the main liquid crystal (first image display). It may be provided on the left and right sides of the device 7), or one sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub liquid crystal or right sub liquid crystal). Can be done. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide one or more sub-liquid crystals on the game board side while providing the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment. is there. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by a plurality of image display devices.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image) provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area). The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) were all image display devices composed of a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display device), but the type of display device is not limited to the liquid crystal display, for example, a drum display device or the like. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like. Further, different types of display devices may be mixed in the plurality of display devices including the main display device and the sub display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiment, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 71 and the third. The image display device 72 may be used as a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. As a result, it is possible to display a variety of effects by a plurality of display devices having different display methods, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Other]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (Examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
A conventional gaming machine is provided with a first starting port, a second starting port, a first large winning opening, and a second large winning opening, and when a game ball enters the first starting port, the first symbol is variablely displayed and the first symbol is displayed. 2 When a game ball enters the starting port, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, only one of the first major winning opening or the second major winning opening is opened, or the first major winning opening and the second major winning opening are opened. There was a gaming machine that executes a jackpot game in which the winning openings are opened in a predetermined order (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811).

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the second starting port is a variable starting port, the ball entering frequency is lowered in the low base state, and the ball entering frequency is increased in the high base state. There was a game aimed at one starting port, and in a high base state, a game was aimed at a second starting port. In addition, there have been so-called right-handed pachinko machines that aim at the right side area of the game area in a big hit game or a high base state. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is performed, and once the advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the transition mode of the gaming state is uniform, and it has not been possible to provide highly palatable gaming.

The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and unlike conventional gaming machines, it provides a highly palatable gaming state, diversifies the transition mode of the gaming state, and enhances the gaming interest. It provides a gaming machine.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The third starting port where the game ball can enter and
A first hit / fail determination executing means that executes a first hit / fail determination based on a ball entering the first start port or the second start port, and
A second hit / fail determination execution means for executing a second hit / fail determination to be executed based on the ball entering the third start port, and
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. , And the game state setting means that can be set,
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific result), and the first start The mouth is provided in the first gaming area,
The second starting port and the third starting port are provided in the second gaming area.
A first game (low probability low base state) in which a game ball is launched into the first game area in the first game state and executed mainly based on the first hit / fail determination, and the second game in the second game state. A second game (low accuracy and high base state) in which a game ball is fired into an area and executed mainly based on the first hit / fail determination, and a game ball is fired into the second game area in the first game state and the first game ball is fired. 2 It is characterized by having a third game (high accuracy and low base state) that is mainly executed by a hit / fail judgment.

According to such a gaming machine, a first start port for executing the first hit / fail judgment is arranged in the first game area, and the first hit / fail judgment is executed in the second game area (the first state and the second state). A variable second starting port and a third starting port for executing the second hit / fail determination are arranged. Further, as the gaming state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is low (predetermined frequency), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is higher than that of the first gaming state. It has a high second gaming state. Then, in the first game state, the first game is launched aiming at the first start port of the first game area and executed mainly by the first hit / fail determination, and in the second game state, the second start port of the second game area is executed. The first game, which is mainly executed by aiming at and executing the first hit / fail judgment, and the second game, which is mainly executed by aiming at the third start port of the second game area in the first game state and executing the second hit / fail judgment. It has one game and.

As a result, the player can play the first game, the second game, and the third game having different game modes according to the transition of the game state, and enhance the game interest by the transition mode of various game states and the new game characteristics. It will be possible. In the first game state, the frequency of ball entry to the first game area and the ball to enter the first start port is higher than the frequency of ball entry to the second game area to enter the second start port. May be higher.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1.
As a result of the first hit / fail determination in the first game in which the game ball is launched into the first game area, the player has a first big hit and a second big hit.
As a result of the first hit / fail determination in the second game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area, the player has a first big hit and a second big hit.
As a result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area, the player has a third big hit and a fourth big hit.
In the first game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the second big hit, the third game can be executed. age,
In the second game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / miss determination is the second big hit, the third game can be executed. age,
In the third game, when the result of the second hit / fail determination is the third big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the second hit / miss determination is the fourth big hit, the third game can be executed. It is characterized by the fact that.

According to such a gaming machine, the result of the first hit / fail determination in the first game in which the game ball is launched into the first game area, and the first hit / fail determination in the second game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area. As a result, it has a first big hit and a second big hit, and has a third big hit and a fourth big hit as a result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area. Then, in the first game after the start of the game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the second big hit is reached, the third game can be executed. Further, in the case of the second game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first hit / fail determination in the second game becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result becomes the second big hit. Further, in the case of the third game, the second game can be executed when the result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game becomes the third big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result becomes the fourth big hit.

As a result, regardless of whether the first game is a first big hit or a second big hit after the start of the game, the subsequent game is played by firing a game ball into the second game area. Further, regardless of whether the second game or the third game is performed while performing the game to be launched into the second game area, the game (second game) in which the first hit / fail judgment is performed and the second game are performed. 2 It is possible to play a game while shifting the game mode (game state) with the game (third game) for which the hit / fail judgment is performed. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game by changing the transition mode of various game states and new game playability.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2.
In the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state based on the execution of the first hit / fail determination a specific number of times, and the game shifts to the first game. ..

According to such a gaming machine, when the first hit / fail determination is executed a specific number of times in the second game, the second gaming state becomes the first gaming state, and the game shifts to the first gaming. As a result, the game shifts from the second game to the first game by executing the winning / failing determination a specific number of times. Further, in the game that executes the same first hit / fail determination, the game shifts from the launch game to the second game area to the launch game to the first game area. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game by changing the transition mode of various game states and new game playability.

The third game may be continued even if the second hit / fail determination is executed a specific number of times. In addition, the third game may be continued until the result of the second hit / miss determination is a big hit.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
As a result of the second hit / fail determination, a small hit (second specific result) is obtained, and when the small hit is reached, a predetermined amount of game profit can be obtained.
The second hit / fail determination is more likely to be the small hit than the first hit / fail determination.
In the second game, the execution frequency of the first hit / fail determination is higher than that of the first game, so that the reduction speed of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game.
The third game is characterized in that the rate of decrease of the game medium is slower than that of the second game by making it possible to obtain a game profit by the small hit.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a small hit that can obtain a predetermined amount of game profit as a result of the second hit / fail judgment, and the second hit / fail judgment has a higher probability than the first hit / fail judgment. It is supposed to be a hit. That is, the third game has a higher probability of being a small hit than the first and second games. Further, it is assumed that the second game, which is the second game state, has a higher execution frequency of the first hit / miss determination than the first game, which is the first game state. In the second game, the rate of decrease of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game, and in the third game, the rate of decrease of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the second game. As a result, the third game is a game that is more advantageous than the second game, and the second game is a game that is more advantageous than the first game. Further, as a result, it is possible to diversify the transition mode among various gaming states having different advantages, and to enhance the gaming interest by new game characteristics. It should be noted that the result of the second hit / fail determination may be a small hit, and the result of the first hit / fail determination may be no small hit.

Further, in the second game state, there may be a fourth game (high accuracy and high base state) in which the game ball is launched into the second game area and the first hit / fail determination is mainly executed. Further, the fourth game may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, in the fourth game, the execution frequency of the first hit / fail judgment is higher than that in the first game, so that the decrease speed of the game medium is slower than in the first game, and the third game is a game by a small hit. By making it possible to obtain profits, the rate of decrease of the game medium may be slower than that of the second game and the fourth game. Further, since both the second game and the fourth game are in the second game state, the reduction speed of the game medium may be substantially the same.

Further, in the first game, when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the second big hit (corresponding to the second big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of Example 1). When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of Example 1 are reached, the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1). The fourth game can be executed,
In the second game, when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the second big hit (Example). When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of 1 are reached), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the fourth game is executed. Make the game executable
In the third game, when the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the third big hit (corresponding to the 2R 7th big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the fourth big hit (Example). When the 15R 5th jackpot of 1 is reached, the 3rd game can be executed, and when the result of the 2nd hit / fail judgment is the 6th jackpot (corresponding to the 2R 6th jackpot of Example 1), the 4th game can be executed. ,
In the fourth game, when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the second big hit (Example). When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of 1 are reached), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the fourth game is executed. The game may be executable.

The "decrease rate of the game medium used for the game" is given in the same period from the game medium (fired game ball) used in a unit time (for example, 1 minute) or a unit number of shots (for example, 100 shots). The number obtained by subtracting the game media (paid out prize balls) is calculated as the number of reductions in the game media (game balls). In the first game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game, when the game is played for a predetermined period, the decrease speed of the game medium (game ball, possession ball) owned by the player is in descending order of the decrease speed. , 1st game> 2nd game (4th game)> 3rd game. In the third game, the more the game is continued, the more balls can be held by a small hit, so that the decrease speed can be said to be negative. That is, the first game, the second game, and the fourth game are in a state of playing while reducing the number of balls held, while the third game is in a state of playing while increasing the number of balls held.

In addition, the jackpot type (first jackpot type) when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is a jackpot is more than the jackpot type (second jackpot type) when the result of the second hit / fail judgment is a jackpot. It may be many. In addition, as the third game (high accuracy and low base state) that occurs as a result of the second hit / fail judgment, there are cases where the prize ball is obtained after a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and a case where the prize ball is acquired. It is assumed that there is a case where the third game is reached after an easy jackpot game. In addition, as the third game (high accuracy and low base state) that occurs as a result of the first hit / fail judgment, there is no case where the prize ball goes through a big hit game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball. It may be possessed only when it becomes the third game after the jackpot game which is easy to acquire.

Further, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination is set to be higher than the probability of a big hit in the high probability, and the possibility of occurrence of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination can be increased. More preferably, it is desirable that the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination is 1/2 or more. Further, the probability of entering the high probability state (probability of operating the probability fluctuation function) is the same in the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment. On the other hand, the probability of entering the state C (high probability / low base state) may be different between the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment, and the state C (high probability / low base state) of the second hit / fail judgment may be obtained. The rush probability of is higher than that of the first hit / fail judgment. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the launch game to the second game area in which the third game for which the second hit / fail determination is performed can be executed, and to enhance the game interest.

In addition, in the second hit / fail judgment, if a big hit does not enter the state C (high accuracy / low base state), the big hit is the number of prize balls that can be obtained among the big hits (big hit game) in the second hit / fail judgment. Is the least big hit (big hit game). Further, the big hit is a big hit (big hit game) in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained is the smallest among the big hits (big hit game) in the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by diversifying the transition mode of the gaming state.

(Reference Invention 2)
In some conventional gaming machines, a hit / fail judgment is made based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the hit / miss judgment. In such a gaming machine, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, and if the result of the hit / miss judgment is wrong, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the missed symbol. .. Further, as a symbol, there is a gaming machine having a plurality of symbols of a special symbol and an effect symbol (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

Further, the special symbol and the effect symbol of the conventional gaming machine are both variable display and stop display based on the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, the special symbol shows the result of the hit / fail judgment by stopping and displaying the change display without performing the game effect such as the reach variation, and the effect symbol displays the stop display by performing the game effect such as the reach variation after the variation display. This shows the result of the pass / fail judgment. By having a plurality of symbols in this way, it is possible to control the display according to the purpose of each symbol.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is not easy to confirm the consistency between the two symbols due to the relationship between the display mode and the display position of the plurality of symbols. The present invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a fair gaming machine by facilitating confirmation of a plurality of symbols by displaying a plurality of symbols.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
A winning / failing determination executing means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The first identification information display unit (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) that variablely displays the first identification information (special symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A second identification information display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b) that variablely displays the second identification information (effect symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A third identification information display unit (variable state indicator 49) that variablely displays the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A game effect display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b, first display screen 7a) capable of displaying a game effect (reach effect, etc.) executed in association with the variable display of the second identification information.
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a specific result.
A first display unit (main display 40) having the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and
It is characterized by including a second display unit (image display device 7, display screen 7a) having the second identification information display unit and the game effect display unit.

According to such a gaming machine, a first identification information display unit that variablely displays the first identification information (special symbol, first special symbol, second special symbol) and a second identification information (effect symbol) are variablely displayed. The second identification information display unit, the third identification information display unit that displays the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) in a variable manner, and the game effect executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information can be displayed. It has a game effect display unit. Further, a first display unit including a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and a second display unit including a second identification information display unit and a game effect display unit. It has a department.

This makes it possible to confirm the second identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment and the game effect by checking the second display unit, and based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by checking the first display unit. The first identification information and the third identification information that are variablely displayed can be confirmed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1.
A gaming machine that has a gaming area in which a gaming ball can flow down, and allows the gaming ball to flow down into the gaming area to play a game.
The first display unit is provided inside the game area, and the second display unit is provided outside the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, a first display unit having a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit is arranged outside (outside) the game area, and a second identification is performed. A second display unit having an information display unit and a game effect display unit is arranged inside (inside) the game area. As a result, by providing a second display unit in the game area that displays the result of the game effect such as the reach effect and the result of the hit / miss determination, the second display unit is provided while checking the flow of the game ball. It is possible to confirm the display mode of. Further, by arranging the first display unit capable of confirming the first identification information and the third identification information outside the game area separately from the second display unit, the first display unit can be arranged without being confused by the game production or the like. It is possible to surely grasp the display mode of the identification information and the third identification information.

The first display unit is arranged outside the game area (the area outside the rail member that divides the game area), and the second display unit is inside the game area (the area inside the rail member that divides the game area). It may be arranged in.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2.
The first display unit is composed of LEDs, and the second display unit is composed of liquid crystals.
The second display unit is characterized in that it is larger than the first display unit.

According to such a gaming machine, the first display unit is composed of LEDs, the second display unit is composed of liquid crystals, and the second display unit is a display unit larger than the first display unit. As a result, the display mode of the first display unit can be simplified to ensure that the display modes of the first identification information and the third identification information can be grasped, and the second display unit is larger than the first display unit. In addition, by configuring it with liquid crystal, it is possible to execute a variety of game productions and enhance the game's interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3.
A main control unit having the hit / fail determination executing means,
It has a sub-control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control.
The first identification information display unit constituting the first display unit is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit and the second display unit constituting the first display unit are displayed by the sub control unit. It is characterized by display control.

Such a gaming machine has a main control unit and a sub-control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control. Then, among the first display units, the first identification information display unit is display-controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit is display-controlled by the sub-control unit. Further, the display control of the second display unit that displays the game effect and the second identification information is performed by the sub control unit. That is, the first display unit displays the first identification information whose display is controlled by the main control unit and the third identification information whose display is controlled by the sub control unit. Thereby, by confirming the first display unit, it is possible to confirm both the display modes of the identification information (first identification information and the third identification information) controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit. Further, this makes it possible to easily confirm the consistency of the identification information controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit.

The main control unit is a control unit that executes a control related to display control of a special symbol, a control related to a hit / fail judgment, a game related to sensor detection, a control related to the discharge of a prize ball, and a control related to opening and closing of a variable entrance, and is a control unit that controls the game. Is. Further, the sub control unit is a control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs predetermined control, and is a main control unit that controls the operation of the movable member and the display control of the effect display unit and other game effects. It is a control unit that is a subordinate of the control unit.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4.
A game information storage means that can store predetermined game information,
Power supply means (power supply board 109) for supplying power and
Based on the detection of a drop in the power supply voltage, the game information stored in the game information storage means can be stored for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped.
A game information recovery means for recovering game information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the storage holding means when the power supply means starts power supply is provided.
When the game information recovery means recovers game information, the third identification information display unit recovers faster than the second display unit, and display control can be executed.

According to such a game machine, when the power supply is started, the game information recovery means for recovering the game information when the memory holding means detects a decrease in the power supply voltage based on the game information stored in the memory is provided. .. Then, when the game information is restored, the third identification information display unit possessed by the first display unit is restored earlier than the second display unit so that the display control can be executed. The second display unit is composed of a liquid crystal in order to diversify the game production, and since various display controls are performed, it takes a certain amount of time to restore the game information. On the other hand, since the first display unit (third identification information display unit), which is simply configured by the LED, performs simple display control, it does not take a long time to recover the game information.

As a result, even if the display unit is controlled by the same sub-control unit, the third identification information display unit is restored prior to the second display unit, and the display control can be executed as soon as possible. In addition, this makes it possible to start the game immediately after the start of power supply in accordance with the return of the main control unit, but it takes time to restore the second display unit composed of the liquid crystal (it is still restored even after the start of the game). Not). Even in such a situation, it is possible to confirm the display contents to be displayed and controlled by the sub-control unit by confirming the third identification information display unit which has spread quickly and can start the display control.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention 2, it is possible to easily confirm a plurality of symbols and provide a fair gaming machine by displaying a plurality of symbols.

(Reference Invention 3)
In the conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that shoots a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board to play a game. The launch of the game ball is performed by operating a launch operation unit including a launch handle or the like that can be rotated, and it is possible to adjust the strength of the launch intensity according to the operation mode. In the game area, various entrances are provided to trigger game operations such as payout of prize balls and winning / fail judgment, and the entrances to be entered are predetermined according to the game state. .. The player operates the launch operation unit, launches the game ball aiming at the ball entry port to be entered, and advances the game. In this type of gaming machine, a first region in which a gaming ball launched with a relatively weak firing intensity (also referred to as "first firing intensity") flows down, and a relatively strong firing intensity ("second firing intensity"). A game machine having a game property in which a second area in which a game ball launched in (also referred to as) flows down is provided in the game area, and the game ball is launched toward the first area or the second area depending on the game state. Is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-221105).

However, in a board configuration in which a ball passage having a passage width equivalent to about one game ball is provided from the upstream side to the downstream side of the second region as in JP-A-2015-221105, the second firing intensity is obtained (No. 1). There is only one path by which the game ball launched (toward the two regions) can flow down. Therefore, there is a problem that the degree of freedom of adjustment related to the game ball launched at the second firing intensity, such as the amount of the game ball flowing down the second region and the ball entry rate, is low.

The present invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of freedom of adjustment related to a gaming ball launched at a second firing intensity. There is.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
A game board with a game area formed,
A launch operation unit that can be operated by the player,
A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward the gaming area based on the operation of the launching operation unit is provided.
The firing intensity of the game ball by the launching means can be adjusted according to the operation mode of the launching operation unit.
The game area includes a first area in which a game ball launched with a first firing intensity can flow down, and a second area in which a game ball launched with a second firing intensity higher than the first firing intensity can flow down. , Is provided,
The game board has a first path for guiding a game ball launched at the second firing intensity to an entry region in the second region, and a game ball launched at the second firing intensity in the entry region. It is characterized in that a second path that leads to the outside of the game area is provided without leading to.

According to such a gaming machine, the flow path of the game ball launched at the second firing intensity includes the first path for guiding the game ball to the entry area in the second region and the first path for guiding the game ball to the entry region without guiding the game ball to the entry region. There is a second path leading to the outside of the gaming area. Therefore, depending on the design value of the ratio (passage rate) at which the game ball launched at the second firing intensity flows down (passes) through the first path or the second path, the ball entering region (within the second region) or the game The amount of game balls guided out of the area can be adjusted. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom of adjustment related to the game ball launched at the second firing intensity.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1.
The first path is provided with a first ball passage extending vertically.
The second path is provided with a second ball passage extending vertically.
The first ball passage and the second ball passage are provided side by side.

According to such a gaming machine, since each of the first path and the second path is provided with a vertically extending ball passage (first ball passage and second ball passage), the first path and the second path are provided. The game ball passing through the ball can quickly flow down. Further, since the first ball passage and the second ball passage are provided side by side, it is possible to suppress the installation space of the ball passage on the game board so that the game area is not narrowed. As a result, the game ball launched with the second firing intensity can be quickly guided to the entry area (inside the second area) or outside the game area in a space-saving manner.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or 3-2.
The ball entry area is provided with a variable ball entry port that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter.
The first path is provided with a passage port through which a game ball can pass.
It is assumed that the variable entrance port may change to the second state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage port.
It is characterized in that a branch portion that branches into the first path and the second path is provided above the passage port.

According to such a gaming machine, a variable entry port is provided in the entry area in the second region, and is variable based on the passage of the game ball through the passage opening provided in the first path. It is assumed that the ball entry port can change to the second state (ball entry possible state). A branch portion that branches into the first path and the second path is provided above the passage port. Therefore, the rate at which the game ball launched at the second firing intensity is distributed to the first path at the branch portion, that is, the rate of flowing down (passing) through the first path (passing rate) is the rate of passing through the passing port (passing rate). Pass rate). As a result, the passage that triggers the change of the variable entrance to the second state according to the design value of the ratio (passage rate) at which the game ball launched at the second launch intensity flows down (passes) through the first path. The passage rate of the mouth can be adjusted.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3.
In the ball entry area
The first entrance and
A second ball entry port located downstream of the first ball entry port and
An discharge port located between the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port and capable of ejecting a game ball that did not enter the first ball entry port to the outside of the machine is provided. It is characterized by being done.

According to such a gaming machine, the ball entry area in the second area is provided with a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port located on the downstream side of the first ball entry port. Further, between the first entry port and the second entry port, a discharge port capable of discharging the game ball that did not enter the first entry port to the outside of the machine is provided. ing. Therefore, among the game balls that are launched at the second firing intensity and flow down in the second area (entry area), the game balls that do not enter the first entry port are the second entry openings. Before entering the ball, the ball is discharged to the outside of the machine through the discharge port, or the ball can be entered into the second entry port. As a result, the ball entry rate to the second ball entry port can be adjusted according to the design value of the ratio of passing through the second ball entry port or the discharge port.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4.
In the second region, a stepped passage is formed in which a game ball that has flowed down the first path can pass through and is formed in a stepped manner.
The first entrance is provided in the upper passage of the staggered passages.
The second entrance is provided in the lower passage of the staggered passages.
The discharge port is characterized in that it is provided at a stepped portion between the upper passage and the lower passage.

According to such a gaming machine, among the stepped passages formed in the second region in a stepped manner, a first ball entry port is provided in the upper passage and a second ball entry port is provided in the lower passage. A discharge port is provided at a step portion between the upper passage and the lower passage. Therefore, it is possible to use the step of the stepped passage as a space for discharging the game ball to the outside of the machine. As a result, the ball entry rate to the second entry port can be adjusted while saving space in the entry area.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention 3, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of adjustment related to the gaming ball launched at the second firing intensity.

(Reference Invention 4)
In a conventional gaming machine, based on the result of a determination executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied becomes a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player can be executed, and the gaming state after the special game is usually set. A gaming machine that can control a more advantageous gaming state is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, an attempt is made to enhance the effect of the decorative symbol in the advantageous gaming state by changing the display mode of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed during the advantageous gaming state to a dedicated symbol different from the normal gaming state. It exists (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-11387).

However, even if the display mode (effect mode) of the display effect is changed according to the gaming state by changing the display mode of the decorative design as in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-11387, the design is displayed in a variable manner. The basic effect mode, such as displaying a stop afterwards, is the same regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, there are few changes (differences) in the production mode, and it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the game entertainment.

The present reference invention 4 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
The first variable entrance that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
A first special game execution means capable of executing a first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-entry state, and
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-entry state, and
A first special game determining means for determining whether or not to execute the first special game based on the acquired information acquired by satisfying a predetermined acquisition condition, and
A second special game determining means for determining whether or not to execute the second special game based on the acquired information, and
A state determining means for determining which of a plurality of gaming states the gaming state after the first special game is to be when the first special game is executed, and
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production,
The plurality of gaming states include at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is determined to be performed more frequently when the second special game is executed as compared with the first gaming state.
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the first special game is to be executed in the second gaming state and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the second gaming state, a plurality of symbols are displayed on a predetermined display unit. A symbol display effect to be displayed in a specific display mode is executed before the start of the first special game.
When it is determined that the first special game is to be executed in the second gaming state and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the first gaming state, the symbol display effect is not executed. It is characterized in that a suggestion display effect of displaying a suggestion image suggesting the end of the second game state on the display unit is executed before the start of the first special game.

According to such a gaming machine, there are at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state as gaming states that can be shifted after the first special gaming. In the second game state, it is determined that the second special game is executed more frequently than in the first game state, so that the second special game is executed more frequently. Therefore, it can be said that the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. In such a second gaming state, when it is determined that the first special game is executed and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the second gaming state, a plurality of symbols are displayed in a specific display mode. The symbol display effect is executed on a predetermined display unit before the start of the first special game. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, when it is determined that the first special game is executed and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the first gaming state, a symbol displaying a plurality of symbols in a specific display mode. A suggestion display effect for displaying a suggestion image suggesting the end of the second game state is executed on a predetermined display unit before the start of the first special game without the display effect being executed. Therefore, in the second game state, whether the subsequent game state becomes the second game state or the first game state depending on the effect mode performed before the start of the first special game when the first special game is executed. It becomes possible to determine whether or not. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in the second game state, which is more advantageous than the first game state, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
A probability setting means capable of setting the probability of being determined to execute the first special game to a predetermined low probability or a high probability higher than the low probability is provided.
The first gaming state includes a low probability and first gaming state in which the probability is the low probability and a high probability and the first gaming state in which the probability is the high probability.
The effect executing means is
In the second game state, it is determined that the first special game is executed, and the game state after the first special game is determined to be the first game state with the low probability, and the first special game. In any case where it is determined to execute the above and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the first gaming state with a high probability, the suggestion display effect is performed without executing the symbol display effect. It is characterized in that it is executed before the start of the first special game.

According to such a gaming machine, there are "low probability and first gaming state" and "high probability and first gaming state" as the first gaming state. The low probability and the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined to execute the first special game is a predetermined low probability, and the high probability and the first gaming state is determined to execute the first special game. It is a gaming state in which the probability of being played is higher than the low probability. Therefore, it can be said that the high-probability and first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability and first gaming state. Then, when it is determined that the first special game is executed in the second game state, and when it is determined that the game state after the first special game is set to the "low probability and the first game state", and the "high probability". In any case where it is determined to be in the "first game state", the symbol display effect is not executed, and the above-mentioned suggestion display effect is executed before the start of the first special game. Therefore, even if a suggestion display effect suggesting a transition to the first gaming state (that is, the end of the second gaming state), which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state, is executed, the first gaming state has a "high probability". And there is a possibility of "first game state". As a result, even if the suggestion display effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the determination probability related to the first special game is high.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2.
The effect executing means is
In the second game state, when it is determined that the first special game is executed and the game state after the first special game is determined to be the first game state with the low probability, and when the first special game is determined. In any case where it is determined to execute the above and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the first gaming state with the high probability, the predetermined first effect image is displayed on the display unit. 1 The display effect is executed after the end of the first special game.

According to such a gaming machine, when it is determined that the first special game is executed in the second gaming state, the gaming state after the first special game is set to "low probability and first gaming state". In both the case where it is determined and the case where it is determined to be in the "high probability and first game state", the first display for displaying a predetermined first effect image on the display unit after the end of the first special game. The production is executed. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether the first gaming state after the first special game is the "low probability and the first gaming state" or the "high probability and the first gaming state" through the first display effect. Become. This makes it possible to improve the interest in the first game state after the first special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3.
The first special game includes a first round number special game in which the number of rounds is a predetermined first round number, and a second round number in which the number of rounds is larger than the first round number. There is a special game,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second round number special game is to be executed in the second game state and the game state after the second round number special game is determined to be the second game state, the symbol display effect is displayed. Executed before the start of the second round number special game,
When it is determined that the first round number special game is to be executed in the second game state and the game state of the first round number special game is determined to be the first game state, the symbol display effect is executed. It is characterized in that the suggestion display effect is executed before the start of the first special game without doing so.

According to such a gaming machine, there are a "first round number special game" and a "second round number special game" as the first special game. The first round number special game is the first special game in which the number of rounds is a predetermined first round number, and the second round number special game is the second round number in which the number of rounds is larger than the first round number. This is the first special game to be played. Therefore, it can be said that the second round number special game is a more advantageous game state for the player than the first round number special game. Then, in the second game state, when it is determined that the second round number special game is executed and the game state after the second round number special game is determined to be the second game state, the above-mentioned symbol display effect is the first. 2 rounds Performed before the start of the special game. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first round number special game is executed and the game state of the first round number special game is determined to be the first game state, the symbol display effect is not executed and the above-mentioned suggestion display effect is performed. Will be executed. Therefore, the symbol display effect in the second game state means the transition to the second game state (continuation of the second game state) and the execution of the second round number special game, and the suggestion display in the second game state. The effect means the transition to the first gaming state (end of the second gaming state) and the execution of the first round number special game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the superiority of the symbol display effect over the suggestion display effect and improve the interest in the second gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4.
When it is determined that the second round number special game is to be executed in the second game state and the game state after the second round number special game is determined to be the second game state, the effect executing means It is characterized in that the first special game execution means may start the second round number special game without executing the symbol display effect.

According to such a gaming machine, when it is determined that the second round number special game is executed in the second gaming state and the gaming state after the second round number special game is determined to be the second gaming state, It is assumed that the second round number special game may be started without executing the above-mentioned symbol display effect. Therefore, the symbol display effect is not always executed at the start of the second round number special game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the starting mode of the second round number special game from being uniform.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5.
When the first special game executing means starts the second round number special game without the effect executing means executing the symbol display effect, the effect executing means is before the start of the second round number special game. It is characterized in that a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display unit.

According to such a gaming machine, when the second round number special game is started without executing the symbol display effect, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display unit before the start of the special game. Therefore, the second round number special game is started by displaying the predetermined effect image without displaying the plurality of symbols in the specific display mode. As a result, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the mode of starting the second round number special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-6.
The effect executing means is
During the second game state, the second display effect of displaying a predetermined second effect image on the display unit is executed, and at the same time, the second display effect is executed.
Even during the execution of the first special game based on the determination that the first special game is executed in the second game state and the game state after the first special game is determined to be the second game state. , The second display effect can be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, during the second gaming state, a second display effect of displaying a predetermined second effect image on the display unit is executed. As described above, since the second game state is a game state in which the second special game is executed with high frequency, it can be said that the second display effect is an effect related to the second special game. In the second gaming state in which the second display effect is executed, it is determined that the first special game is executed, and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the second gaming state, and the first based on the determination. When the special game is executed, the second display effect can be executed even during the first special game. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the second display effect over the second game state and the first special game. As a result, it is possible to foster a sense of unity between the second game state and the first special game, and to improve the interest in the second game state.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states.

(Reference Invention 5)
In a conventional gaming machine, when a hit / fail judgment is executed based on the entry of a game ball into a start port provided on a game board, a game in which a special symbol variation display is executed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The machine is known. In this type of gaming machine, when the result of the hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit and the corresponding big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and the big hit symbol that is stopped and displayed can be executed according to the type of the stopped and displayed big hit symbol. , There are some that are configured so that the gaming state after the big hit game shifts to a more advantageous gaming state than usual. Recently, as an advantageous gaming state, a gaming machine having a gaming state (small hit rush state) in which a small hit game can be executed frequently due to frequent small hits has appeared. The small hit game is a game in which the large winning opening for the small hit game, which is provided separately from the large winning opening for the big hit game, is opened so that the ball can be entered into the large winning opening. The time is shorter than that of the jackpot game (for example, within 1.8 seconds). In the small hit rush state, since the small hit game is executed frequently, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, which is advantageous for the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016). -193025 (see).

However, a gaming machine having a small hit rush state as in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193025 also has a gaming state other than the small hit rush state (for example, low accuracy / time saving state, high accuracy / time saving state, etc.). Is common. Therefore, the game state after the big hit game is not always the small hit rush state. Nevertheless, if the mode of transition of the game state is made uniform depending on whether the game state is in the small hit rush state or not, there is a risk that the game interest will be deteriorated.

The present reference invention 5 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
The first variable entrance that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
A first special game execution means capable of executing a first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-entry state, and
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-entry state, and
A first special game determining means for determining whether or not to execute the first special game based on the acquired information acquired by satisfying a predetermined acquisition condition, and
A second special game determining means for determining whether or not to execute the second special game based on the acquired information, and
A state determining means for determining which of a plurality of gaming states the gaming state after the first special game is to be when the first special game is executed, and
A state control means for ending the first special game and starting the game state after the first special game when a predetermined end period elapses after the end of all the round games in the first special game.
The end period setting means for setting the end period is provided.
The plurality of gaming states include at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is determined to be performed more frequently when the second special game is executed as compared with the first gaming state.
When the end period setting means is determined to execute the first special game and is determined to change the gaming state after the first special game to the first gaming state, it is determined to execute the first special game. Moreover, it is possible to set the end period longer than when it is determined that the gaming state after the first special game is set to the second gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game is completed after all the round games in the first special game are completed and the predetermined end period elapses, at least the first game state and the second game state are set. One of the gaming states is started. Since the second game state is determined more frequently when the second special game is executed than in the first game state, the second special game is executed more frequently. Therefore, it can be said that the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The end period from the end of all round games in the first special game to the end of the first special game is from the end of all round games to the start of the game state after the first special game. It can be said that this is the period (waiting period). Regarding the setting of this end period, when it is determined that the first special game is executed and the gaming state after the first special game is set to the first gaming state, that is, the gaming state after the first special game is the first. When it becomes one game state, it is determined that the first special game is executed, and it is determined that the game state after the first special game is changed to the second game state, that is, the game state after the first special game. It is possible to set a longer end period than in the case where is in the second game state. Therefore, the period from the end of all round games in the first special game to the start of the first game state is longer than the period from the end of all round games to the start of the second game state. .. As a result, while the transition from the end of all round games in the first special game to the second game state is performed quickly, the transition from the end of all round games in the first special game to the first game state is performed to some extent. It is possible to configure it so that it is done after a pause. By doing so, it is possible to realize a transition mode in which the player slowly shifts to the first game state and quickly shifts to the second game state, so that the progress of the game can be sharpened. It is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
The end period setting means
When it is determined that the first special game is executed in the first game state and the game state after the first special game is determined to be the first game state, the first end period is set as the end period. And
When it is determined that the first special game is executed in the first game state and the game state after the first special game is determined to be the second game state, a second end period is set as the end period. And
The first end period is longer than the second end period.

According to such a gaming machine, when it is determined that the first special game is executed in the first gaming state and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the first gaming state, the above-mentioned is described. A relatively long first end period is set as the end period. Further, in the case where it is determined that the first special game is executed in the first game state and the game state after the first special game is set to the second game state, the above-mentioned end period is relatively short. The second end period is set. Therefore, when the first game state is changed to the first game state through the first special game, the state slowly shifts to the first game state after the first special game, and the first game state is changed to the first special game. In the case of entering the second gaming state through the above, it is possible to adopt a transition mode in which the transition to the second gaming state after the first special game is performed quickly. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the progress of the game a sharpness.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or 5-2.
The end period setting means
When it is determined that the first special game is executed in the first game state and the game state after the first special game is determined to be the first game state, the first end period is set as the end period. And
When it is determined that the first special game is executed in the second game state and the game state after the first special game is determined to be the second game state, a third end period is set as the end period. And
The first end period is longer than the third end period.

According to such a gaming machine, when it is determined that the first special game is executed in the first gaming state and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the first gaming state, the above-mentioned is described. A relatively long first end period is set as the end period. Further, in the second gaming state, when it is determined that the first special game is executed and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the second gaming state, the above-mentioned end period is relatively short. A third end period is set. Therefore, when the first game state is changed to the first game state through the first special game, the state slowly shifts to the first game state after the first special game, and the second game state is changed to the first special game. In the case of entering the second gaming state through the above, it is possible to adopt a transition mode in which the transition to the second gaming state after the first special game is performed quickly. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the progress of the game a sharpness.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-3.
The end period setting means
When it is determined that the first special game is executed in the first game state and the game state after the first special game is determined to be the first game state, the first end period is set as the end period. And
When it is determined that the first special game is executed in the second game state and the game state after the first special game is determined to be the first game state, a fourth end period is set as the end period. And
The first end period is longer than the fourth end period.

According to such a gaming machine, when it is determined that the first special game is executed in the first gaming state and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the first gaming state, the above-mentioned is described. A relatively long first end period is set as the end period. Further, in the second gaming state, when it is determined that the first special game is executed and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the first gaming state, the above-mentioned end period is relatively short. The fourth end period is set. Therefore, when the first game state is changed to the first game state through the first special game, the state slowly shifts to the first game state after the first special game, and the second game state is changed to the first special game. In the case of entering the first gaming state through the above, it is possible to adopt a transition mode in which the transition to the first gaming state after the first special game is performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the progress of the game a sharpness.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-2 to 5-4.
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means is
It is characterized in that during the first end period, it is possible to execute a predetermined first end period effect that is not executed in other end periods other than the first end period.

According to such a gaming machine, it is set when it is determined that the first special game is executed in the first gaming state and the gaming state after the first special game is determined to be the first gaming state. During one end period, it is possible to execute a predetermined first end period effect that is not executed in any end period other than the first end period. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is executed only before the transition to the first gaming state when the first gaming state is changed to the first gaming state through the first special game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the state changes from the first game state to the first game state through the first special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5.
The first end period effect is a character selection effect that allows a player to select one of a plurality of predetermined characters.
The effect executing means is
In the first game state after the first end period has elapsed, the character selected by the character selection effect is displayed on a predetermined display unit.

According to such a gaming machine, as the first end period effect described above, a character selection effect that causes the player to select any one of a plurality of predetermined characters is executed. Then, in the first game state after the first end period has elapsed, that is, in the first game state when the first game state is changed to the first game state through the first special game, the previous character selection effect ( The character selected by the first end period effect) is displayed on a predetermined display unit. Therefore, when the character is changed from the first game state to the first game state through the first special game, the character selection effect executed before the transition to the first game state and the character in the first game state after the transition are performed. It is possible to raise the player's interest in the display. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the state changes from the first game state to the first game state through the first special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5.
The first end period effect is a notice mode selection effect that allows the player to select one of a plurality of predetermined notice modes.
The effect executing means is
In the first game state after the first end period has elapsed, it is possible to execute a notice effect related to the result of the determination by the first special game determination means based on the notice mode selected by the notice mode selection effect. It is characterized by being.

According to such a gaming machine, as the first end period effect described above, a notice mode selection effect that causes the player to select one of a plurality of predetermined notice modes is executed. Then, in the first gaming state after the first end period has elapsed, that is, in the first gaming state when the first gaming state is changed to the first gaming state through the first special game, the previous notice mode selection effect Based on the advance notice mode selected by (1st end period effect), the advance notice effect related to the result of the first special game determination can be executed. Therefore, in the advance notice mode selection effect executed before the transition to the first gaming state when the first gaming state is changed to the first gaming state through the first special game, and in the first gaming state after the transition. It is possible to raise the player's interest in the advance notice production. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the state changes from the first game state to the first game state through the first special game.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 5, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

In addition, any two or more inventions of the above-mentioned reference inventions 1 to 5 may be combined.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 3A left game area (1st area), 3B right game area (2nd area), 3C ball entry area, 7 image display device, 7a display screen, 7b production pattern Display area (effect symbol display), 8 effect symbol, 20 1st start port, 21 2nd start port, 26 3rd start port, 28 gate, 30 1st big prize opening, 34 out port, 34a 1st out port , 34b 2nd out port, 34c 3rd out port, 35 2nd prize opening, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd special symbol display) ), 49 Fluctuation state indicator, 60 Launch handle (launch operation unit), 80 Main control board (main control unit), 90 Sub control board (sub control unit), 100 Image control board (image control unit), 103a 3rd Production hold indicator, 103b 4th production hold indicator, 112 launcher, 301 branch, 302 1st path, 302a 1st game ball passage, 303 2nd path, 303a 2nd game ball passage, 305 game ball passage, 306 upper passage, 306a upper passage, 306b lower passage, 306d step portion, 307 lower passage, 307a upper passage, 307b lower passage, 307d step portion.

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed on the surface,
A launch operation unit that can be operated by the player,
A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward the gaming area based on the operation of the launching operation unit is provided.
The firing intensity of the game ball by the launching means can be adjusted according to the operation mode of the launching operation unit.
The game area includes a first area in which a game ball launched with a first firing intensity can flow down, and a second area in which a game ball launched with a second firing intensity higher than the first firing intensity can flow down. , Is provided,
The game board was launched with a first path for guiding a game ball launched at the second firing intensity to an entry region provided with an entry port in the second region, and at the second firing intensity. The first path is a second path that guides the game ball from the upstream side of the ball entry area to the outside of the game area without guiding the game ball to the ball entry area, and a flow path of the game ball launched with the second firing intensity. A branch portion for branching to the second path and a discharge port for discharging the game balls distributed to the second path to the outside of the machine are provided.
The branch portion is on the upper right side of the surface of the game board, the ball entry area is on the lower right side of the surface of the game board, and the discharge port is on the lower right side of the surface of the game board and is on the right side of the ball entry area. It is provided outside the game area,
Said first path and said second path is assumed to pass through the surface right side of the game board, and has the right of the first ball path is assumed to pass through said second path,
The first path is provided with a first ball passage extending up and down between the branch portion and the ball entry region.
The second path is provided with a second ball passage extending up and down between the branch portion and the discharge port.
The first ball passage and the second ball passage are provided side by side on the surface side of the game board , and the second ball passage is provided on the right side of the first ball passage . A game machine featuring.

Images